Logiq-9-Service-Manual

[Page 1] GE Medical Systems Technical Publication Direction 2294853-100 Revision 3 GE Medical Systems LOGIQ™ 9 Service Manual Operating Documentation Copyright© 2002, 2003 by General Electric All Rights Reserved

[Page 2]

[Page 3] Important Precautions • THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY. • IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TRANSLATION SERVICES. • DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE WARNING MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD. • FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS. • CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS. • SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE TRADUIRE. • NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE AVERTISSEMENT MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS. • LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES. • DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER SPRACHE. • FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT, IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG ZU SORGEN. • VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES WARNUNG KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN WURDE. • WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE GEFAHREN KOMMEN.

[Page 4] • ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS. • SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN. • NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER AVISO CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO. • LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE OTRA NATURALEZA. • ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS. • SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO. ATENÇÃO • NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA. • O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS, MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS. • IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN INGLESE. • SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE. • SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO AVVERTENZA AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO. • NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI. ii -

[Page 5] iii

[Page 6] DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION - FOR USA ONLY All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage In Shipment” on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a GE representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period. For USA Only Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (262) 827-3468 or 8*285-3468 immediately after damage is found. At this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill number, item damaged and extent of damage. For USA Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section “S” of the Policy And Procedures Only Bulletins. CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Medical Systems personnel. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment. OMISSIONS & ERRORS If there are any omissions, errors or suggestions for improving this documentation, please contact the GE Medical Systems Global Documentation Group with specific information listing the system type, manual title, part number, revision number, page number and suggestion details. E-mail the information to : [email protected] GE Medical Systems employees should use the Customer Quality Assurance (CQA) System to report all documentation omissions, errors or suggestions. iv -

[Page 7] Revision History Revision Date Reason for change 0 April 8, 2002 Initial Release 1 November 8, 2002 Update for BT’02 Release, BEP and FEP changes 2 April 4, 2003 Update for R2.1.1 Release and hardware changes 3 October 14, 2003 Update for R3.0 Release and hardware changes List of Effected Pages Pages Revision Pages Revision Pages Revision Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/ Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation Title Page N/A 3 Troubleshooting 3 pages 2-1 to 2-10 pages 7-1 to 7-20 Chapter 8 - Replacement Important Precautions Chapter 3 - Installation 3 3 Procedures 3 pages i to iv pages 3-1 to 3-30 pages 8-1 to 8-38 Rev History/LOEP Chapter 4 - Functional Checks Chapter 9 - Replacement Parts 3 3 3 pages v to vi pages 4-1 to 4-24 pages 9-1 to 9-42 Table of Contents Chapter 5 - Theory Chapter 10 - Periodic Maintenance 3 3 3 pages vii to xxiv pages 5-1 to 5-66 pages 10-1 to 10-26 Chapter 1 - Introduction Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments Index 3 3 3 pages 1-1 to 1-12 pages 6-1 to 6-16 pages I to IV Back Cover N/A

[Page 8] This page was intentionally left blank. vi -

[Page 9] GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 3 LOGIQ™ 9 SERVICE MANUAL Table of Contents CHAPTER 1 Introduction Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 Purpose of Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2 LOGIQ™ 9 Models Covered by this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2 Purpose of Operator Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2 Important Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3 Conventions Used in Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3 Standard Hazard Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4 Product Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5 Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7 Human Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7 Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7 Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8 Labels Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8 Dangerous Procedure Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9 Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9 EMC, EMI, and ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10 CE Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11 Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11 System Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12 vii Table of Contents

[Page 10] CHAPTER 2 Pre-Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 General Console Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 Console Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 LOGIQ™ 9 Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 Inrush Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 Site Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3 Site Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3 Unit Power Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3 Power Stability Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3 EMI Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4 Scan Probe Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5 Time and Manpower Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5 Facility Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6 Purchaser Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6 Required Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7 Desirable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7 Minimal Floor Plan Suggestion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8 Networking Pre-installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9 Purpose of the DICOM Network Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9 DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9 viii -

[Page 11] CHAPTER 3 Installation Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 The Purpose of Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 Installation Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2 Average Installation Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2 Installation Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2 Brake Pedal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2 Operator I/O Panel Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2 Safety Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4 Preparing for Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5 Verify Customer Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5 Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5 System Voltage Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5 Video Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5 EMI Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5 Completing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6 Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6 Scanner Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6 Back-end Processor Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7 Power Off/ Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7 Back-end Processor Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7 Scanner Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8 Transducer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 Physical Dimensions Physical Dimensions of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 Weight without Monitor and Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 Acoustic Noise Output: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 On-Board Optional Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 External I/O Connector Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10 External I/O Pin Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12 Video Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 14 Available Probes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15 Software/Option Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15 ix

[Page 12] Connectivity Installation Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16 Before Starting a Software Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17 Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17 Save Connectivity Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17 Loading Base Image Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 18 System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23 Loading Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24 Loading Applications Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24 System Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 28 To Complete the System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 28 VCR Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 28 Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 28 Print Key Assignment and Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 28 Restore Patient, Report, and User-Defined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 29 Cycle System Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 29 Paperwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 30 Product Locator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 30 User Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 30 x -

[Page 13] CHAPTER 4 Functional Checks Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 Required Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 General Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2 Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2 Scanner Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2 Back-end Processor Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3 Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3 Back End Processor Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3 Scanner Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4 System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5 Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6 Monitor Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7 System B/M-Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8 System CFM and PWD Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9 Basic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10 Distance and Tissue Depth Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10 Circumference/Area (Ellipse) Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10 Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11 Report Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11 Probe/Connectors Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11 Connecting a probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11 Activating the probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11 Deactivating the probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 Disconnecting the probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 Using Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 Activating CINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 Omitting Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 Restoring Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 Quickly Move to Start/End Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 Start Frame/End Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 Adjusting the CINE Loop Playback Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13 Synchronizing Multiple CINE Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13 Disconnecting B-Mode CINE from Timeline CINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13 Moving through a CINE Loop Frame By Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13 Image Management (QG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13 Using the MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14 Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images . . . . . 4 - 15 Formatting Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 15 xi

[Page 14] Backup System Presets and Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16 Restore System Presets and Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17 Archiving Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18 ECG Check Out (this option is currently not available on the LOGIQ™ 9 . . 4 - 20 Software Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 20 Peripheral Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21 Mechanical Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22 Operator I/O Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22 Brakes and Direction Locks Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23 Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24 xii -

[Page 15] CHAPTER 5 Components and Functions (Theory) Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3 Dataflow Control Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4 Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4 Front End Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5 Front End Processor Power Supply Board (FEPS, FEPS2, FEPS2.1) . . . 5 - 5 FEPS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6 Front End Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6 XDIF (Transducer Interface) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7 Top Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7 RF Amp, RF Amp1.2, RF Amp2 Board (Radio Frequency Amplifier Board 5 - TD, TD4, TD5 (Time Delay) Boards (8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9 Scan Control Board (SCB, SCB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11 SCB, SCB2 High Level Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12 Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12 Scan Control Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12 Equalization (EQ) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14 Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15 B/M Mode Processor (BMP) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16 EBM, EBM2 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17 EBM/EBM2 Interface with XDIF relay board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18 B–Mode Output Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19 M–Mode Output Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19 Back End Processor (BEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20 Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21 PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21 AGP Video Card - SVGA Video to the PCVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21 PCIO Board: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21 PCVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21 DGVIC, DGIO and ADD Cards BEP 2.1 (BT’02, November 2002) . . . . . . 5 - 21 Additional Memory (RAM)(BT’03, October 2003) - BEP2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22 xiii

[Page 16] DGVIC/DGIO Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22 UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22 Internal Storage Devices: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23 Location of the Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23 AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23 DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23 Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24 Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25 BEP Power On Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26 BEP Power Off Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27 Operator Console Control PWA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28 Console Main Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29 Main Cable Connector Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29 Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 30 Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ™ 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 33 Internal I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 34 Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37 Jumpers and Dip-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 38 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40 Top Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 43 External I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 43 Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 43 Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 44 Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 44 Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 46 Peripherals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 46 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47 Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47 Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47 xiv -

[Page 17] Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47 Jumpers and Dip-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47 Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 49 Basic Overall AC Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 49 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 50 AC Power PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 50 AC Controller Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 52 Mechanical Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 54 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 54 Top Console Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 54 Air Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 55 Air Flow Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 55 Service Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 55 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 55 Global Service User Interface (GSUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 56 Internationalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 56 Service Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 56 Access / Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 56 Service Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 57 Error Logs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58 Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 60 Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 60 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 62 Diagnostics Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 62 Diagnostic Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 62 Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 63 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 63 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 64 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 64 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 64 PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 65 xv

[Page 18] CHAPTER 6 Service Adjustments Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 Regulatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2 Monitor Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2 Monitor Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4 Monitor Tilt Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4 Monitor Counter-balance Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4 Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5 Touch Panel Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5 Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6 Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6 Z-Release Cable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7 Checking the Release System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7 Cable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8 Cable Adjustment at Gas Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 9 Emergency Release Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10 Procedure Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10 Brake Arm Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11 Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11 Brake Arm Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12 Procedure Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12 Brake Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13 Front Wheel Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13 Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13 Front Brake Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13 xvi -

[Page 19] Rear Wheel Brakes Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14 Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14 Preparations (click here to view the cover removal video) . . . . . . . . 6 - 14 Rear Wheel Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15 Rear Wheel Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15 xvii

[Page 20] CHAPTER 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1 Gathering Trouble Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2 Collect Vital System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2 Collect a Trouble Image with Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3 Screen Captures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 4 Check and Record the P4 Key Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 4 Setting the P4 Key to Screen Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 5 Capturing a Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 6 Reset the P4 Key to Customer’s Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 7 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 8 Acquisition Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 9 Diagnostic Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12 Calibration Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13 I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14 OP Panel Utilities - OP Panel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14 Front Panel Light Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 15 Console Troubleshooting Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 15 Common Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16 Disruptive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16 System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16 PC Diagnostics (Non-Interactive Tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17 CPU Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17 Hard Drive Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17 Memory Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17 CD/DVD Drive Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17 Video Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17 USB Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17 PCI Board Configuration Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17 SCSI Device Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17 AGP Video Card Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17 Network Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17 PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18 Keyboard Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18 xviii -

[Page 21] Audio Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18 Monitor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18 xix

[Page 22] CHAPTER 8 Replacement Procedures Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 2 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3 Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4 Before Starting a Software Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5 Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5 Save Connectivity Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5 Image Management Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6 Managing Patient Data and Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6 Patient Images and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6 Preset Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6 Backup Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6 Export/Import (Moving Data Between Ultrasound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7 Exporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7 Importing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 8 Patient, Report, and User-Defined Backup Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9 Loading Base Image Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 12 System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17 Loading Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18 Loading Applications Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18 Upgrading Application Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 22 Applications Software Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 22 System Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26 To Complete the System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26 VCR Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26 Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26 Print Key Assignment and Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26 Restore Patient, Report, and User-Defined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 27 Cycle System Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 27 xx -

[Page 23] Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 28 Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 28 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 28 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 28 Console Lock Assembly Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 28 Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 29 Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 29 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 29 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 29 Release Lock Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 30 Release Lock Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 30 xxi

[Page 24] CHAPTER 9 Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1 LOGIQ™ 9 Models Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2 List of Abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2 Parts List Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 3 External Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4 Additional Console Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 6 Operator I/O Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 8 Mechanical Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 9 Bumper Kit, Frogleg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 10 Operator Control Panel Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11 Operator Control Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 12 Monitor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 14 Front End Processor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 15 I/O Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 18 Back End Processor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 19 BEP Spare Parts Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 21 Interconnect Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 25 Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 36 Air Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 37 Peripherals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 38 Voice Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 39 Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 40 Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 41 xxii -

[Page 25] CHAPTER 10 Periodic Maintenance Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 Why do Periodic Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 Keeping Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 Maintenance Task Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 How often should maintenance tasks be performed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4 Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4 Specific Requirements for Periodic Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4 System Periodic Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5 Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5 Functional Checks (See Also Chapter 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6 System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6 Peripheral/Option Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7 Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7 Mains Cable Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7 General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7 Air Filter Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8 Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8 Optional Diagnostic Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9 View the Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9 Probe Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9 Probe Related Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9 Basic Probe Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9 Basic Probe Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9 Using a Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10 Electrical Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10 Safety Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10 GEMS Leakage Current Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11 Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12 Grounding Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13 Meter Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13 Chassis Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14 xxiii

[Page 26] Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14 Generic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14 Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 16 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 16 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 16 Generic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 18 Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 18 Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 19 Probe Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 20 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 20 Generic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 20 No Meter Probe Adapter Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 21 Data Sheet for Transducer Source Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 22 When There's Too Much Leakage Current... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 23 xxiv -

[Page 27] Chapter 1 Introduction Section 1-1 Overview 1-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 1 This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing the LOGIQ™ 9 scanner. The service provider must read and understand all the information presented in this manual before installing or servicing a unit. Table 1-1 Contents in Chapter 1 Section Description Page Number 1-1 Overview 1-1 1-2 Important Conventions 1-3 1-3 Safety Considerations 1-7 1-4 EMC, EMI, and ESD 1-10 1-5 Customer Assistance 1-11 1-1-2 Purpose of Service Manual This Service Manual provides installation and service information for the LOGIQ™ 9 Ultrasound Scanning System and contains the following chapters: 1.) Chapter 1 - Introduction: Contains a content summary and warnings. 2.) Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation: Contains pre-installation requirements for the LOGIQ™ 9. 3.) Chapter 3 - Installation: Contains installation procedures. 4.) Chapter 4 - Functional Checks: Contains functional checks that are recommended as part of the installation, or as required during servicing and periodic maintenance. 5.) Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory): Contains block diagrams and functional explanations of the electronics. 6.) Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments: Contains instructions on how to make available adjustments to the LOGIQ™ 9. 7.) Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting: Provides procedures for running diagnostic or related routines for the LOGIQ™ 9. 8.) Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures: Provides disassembly procedures and reassembly procedures for all changeable Field Replaceable Units (FRU). 9.) Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts: Contains a complete list of field replaceable parts for the LOGIQ™ 9. 10.) Chapter 10 - Periodic Maintenance: Provides periodic maintenance procedures for the LOGIQ™ 9. Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1

[Page 28] 1-1-3 Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual • Service Personnel (installation, maintenance, etc.). • Hospital’s Service Personnel • Contractors (Some parts of Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation) 1-1-4 LOGIQ™ 9 Models Covered by this Manual Table 1-2 LOGIQ™ 9 Model Designations Part Number Description 2188900 LOGIQ™ 9 120 V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0 2188900-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0 2188900-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP1.0 2188900-4 LOGIQ™ 9 120 V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.0 2188900-5 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.0 2188900-6 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.0 2351100 LOGIQ™ 9 120 V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02 2351100-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02 2351100-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02 2375600 LOGIQ™ 9 120 V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03 2375600-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03 2375600-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03 1-1-5 Purpose of Operator Manual(s) The Operator Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ™ 9 and also kept near the unit for quick reference. 1-2 Section 1-1 - Overview

[Page 29] Section 1-2 Important Conventions 1-2-1 Conventions Used in Book Icons Pictures, or icons, are used wherever they reinforce the printed message. The icons, labels and conventions used on the product and in the service information are described in this chapter. Safety Precaution Messages Various levels of safety precaution messages may be found on the equipment and in the service information. The different levels of concern are identified by a flag word that precedes the precautionary message. Known or potential hazards are labeled in one of following ways: DANGER DANGER IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED. WARNING WARNING WARNING IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT CAN CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED. CAUTION Caution is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury and property damage if instructions are ignored. NOTICE Equipment Damage Possible Notice is used when a hazard is present that can cause property damage but has absolutely no personal injury risk. Example : Disk drive will crash. NOTE: Notes provide important information about an item or a procedure. Information contained in a NOTE can often save you time or effort. Chapter 1 Introduction 1-3

[Page 30] 1-2-2 Standard Hazard Icons Important information will always be preceded by the exclamation point contained within a triangle, as seen throughout this chapter. In addition to text, several different graphical icons (symbols) may be used to make you aware of specific types of hazards that could cause harm. Table 1-3 Standard Hazard Icons ELECTRICAL MECHANICAL RADIATION LASER HEAT PINCH LASER LIGHT Other hazard icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed. Table 1-4 Standard Icons Indicating a Special Procedure Be Used AVOID STATIC ELECTRICITY TAG AND LOCK OUT WEAR EYE PROTECTION 7$*   /2&.287 EYE PROTECTION 6LJQHG 'DWH 1-4 Section 1-2 - Important Conventions

[Page 31] 1-2-3 Product Icons The following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information provided on the equipment. Table 1-5 Product Icons LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION Manufacturer's name and address Rear of console near power inlet Date of manufacture Identification and Rating Plate Under monitor Model and serial numbers On each probe Electrical ratings Laboratory logo or labels denoting Rear of console Device Listing/Certification Labels conformance with industry safety standards Under front of monitor such as UL or IEC. Type/Class Label Used to indicate the degree of safety or protection. Indicates the degree of protection provided by IP Code (IPX8) the enclosure per IEC 529. IPX8 indicates drip Footswitch proof. Equipment Type BF (man in the box symbol) IEC 878-02-03 indicates B Type equipment Probe connectors having even more electrical isolation than PCG connector standard Type B equipment because it is or Rear of Console intended for intimate patient contact. Equipment Type CF (heart in the box symbol) IEC 878-02-05 indicates equipment having a ECG connector high degree of protection suitable for direct Surgical probes cardiac contact. “CAUTION This unit weighs... Special care must be used to avoid..." This precaution is intended to prevent injury that may result if one person attempt to move On the console where easily seen during transport the unit considerable distances or on an incline due to the weight of the unit. "CAUTION" The equilateral triangle is usually used in combination with other symbols to Various advise or warn the user. Chapter 1 Introduction 1-5

[Page 32] Table 1-5 Product Icons (Continued) LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION ATTENTION - Consult accompanying documents " is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other Various instructions when complete information cannot be provided on the label. "CAUTION - Dangerous voltage" (the lightning flash with arrowhead in equilateral triangle) is Various used to indicate electric shock hazards. "Mains OFF" Indicates the power off position of Rear of system adjacent to mains switch the mains power switch. "OFF/Standby" Indicates the power off/ standby position of the power switch. CAUTION Adjacent to On-Off/Standby Switch This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains Supply "Mains ON" Indicates the power on position of the mains power switch. "ON" Indicates the power on position of the power switch. Front Panel Switch CAUTION This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains Supply "Protective Earth" Indicates the protective Internal earth (grounding) terminal. "Equipotentiality" Indicates the terminal to be used for connecting equipotential conductors Rear of console when interconnecting (grounding) with other equipment. 1-6 Section 1-2 - Important Conventions

[Page 33] Section 1-3 Safety Considerations 1-3-1 Introduction The following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. 1-3-2 Human Safety Operating personnel must not remove the system covers. Servicing should be performed by authorized personnel only. Only personnel who have participated in a LOGIQ™ 9 Training are authorized to service the equipment. 1-3-3 Mechanical Safety WARNING WARNING WHEN THE UNIT IS RAISED FOR A REPAIR OR MOVED ALONG ANY INCLINE, USE EXTREME CAUTION SINCE IT MAY BECOME UNSTABLE AND TIP OVER. WARNING WARNING ULTRASOUND PROBES ARE HIGHLY SENSITIVE MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS THAT CAN EASILY BE DAMAGED BY IMPROPER HANDLING. USE CARE WHEN HANDLING AND PROTECT FROM DAMAGE WHEN NOT IN USE. DO NOT USE A DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE PROBE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PRECAUTIONS CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE. WARNING WARNING NEVER USE A PROBE THAT HAS FALLEN TO THE FLOOR. EVEN IF IT LOOKS OK, IT MAY BE DAMAGED. CAUTION Always lower and center the Opertaor I/O Panel before moving the scanner. CAUTION The LOGIQ™ 9 weighs 225 kg or more, depending on installed peripherals, (500 lbs., or more) when ready for use. Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts. Failure to follow the precautions listed could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and costly damage. ALWAYS: Be sure the pathway is clear. Use slow, careful motions. Use two people when moving on inclines or lifting more than 16 kg (35 lbs). Chapter 1 Introduction 1-7

[Page 34] 1-3-3Mechanical Safety (cont’d) NOTE: Special care should be taken when transporting the unit in a vehicle: • Secure the unit in an upright position. • Lock the wheels (brake) • DO NOT use the Control Panel as an anchor point. • Place the probes in their carrying case. • Eject any Magneto Optical disk or CD from their drive. CAUTION Keep the heat venting holes on the monitor unobstructed to avoid overheating of the monitor. 1-3-4 Electrical Safety To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis must be connected to an electrical ground. The system is equipped with a three-conductor AC power cable. This must be plugged into an approved electrical outlet with safety ground. If an extension cord is used with the system, make sure that the total current rating of the system does not exceed the extension cord rating. The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment. Both the system power cable and the power connector meet international electrical standards. 1-3-5 Labels Locations Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 2, for the label locations. 1-8 Section 1-3 - Safety Considerations

[Page 35] 1-3-6 Dangerous Procedure Warnings Warnings, such as the examples below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed. DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING. WARNING WARNING EXPLOSION WARNING DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE. OPERATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT CONSTITUTES A DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD. WARNING WARNING DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT BECAUSE OF THE DANGER OF INTRODUCING ADDITIONAL HAZARDS, DO NOT INSTALL SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR PERFORM ANY UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION OF THE EQUIPMENT. 1-3-7 Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only) Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the electrical Mains plug. 1-3-8 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances. GEMS policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to shipment. GEMS employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or an ultrasound probe). The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the people who will receive or open this package. NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items that were saturated and/or dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purposes and must be transported as a hazardous material. Chapter 1 Introduction 1-9

[Page 36] Section 1-4 EMC, EMI, and ESD 1-4-1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Electromagnetic compatibility describes a level of performance of a device within its electromagnetic environment. This environment consists of the device itself and its surroundings including other equipment, power sources and persons with which the device must interface. Inadequate compatibility results when a susceptible device fails to perform as intended due interference from its environment or when the device produces unacceptable levels of emission to its environment. This interference is often referred to as radio–frequency or electromagnetic interference (RFI/EMI) and can be radiated through space or conducted over interconnecting power of signal cables. In addition to electromagnetic energy, EMC also includes possible effects from electrical fields, magnetic fields, electrostatic discharge and disturbances in the electrical power supply. 1-4-2 CE Compliance The LOGIQ™ 9 unit conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits and to immunity from electrostatic discharge, radiated and conducted RF fields, magnetic fields and power line transient requirements. For applicable standards refer to the Safety Chapter in the Basic User Manual. NOTE: For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh, clamps, are in good condition, installed tightly without skew or stress. Proper installation following all comments noted in this service manual is required in order to achieve full EMC performance. 1-4-3 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention WARNING WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS: 1.ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (TO THE RIGHT OF THE POWER CONNECTOR). 2.FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT. 1-10 Section 1-4 - EMC, EMI, and ESD

[Page 37] Section 1-5 Customer Assistance 1-5-1 Contact Information If this equipment does not work as indicated in this service manual or in the User Manual, or if you require additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support resource, as listed below. Prepare the following information before you call: - System ID serial number. - Software version. Table 1-6 Phone Numbers for Customer Assistance Location Phone Number USA/ Canada Service GE Medical Systems 1-800–437–1171 Ultrasound Service Engineering 4855 W. Electric Avenue Milwaukee, WI 53219 Applications Customer Answer Center 1-800-682-5327 1-262-524-5698 Fax: +1-414-647-4125 Latin America Service GE Medical Systems 1-262-524-5300 Ultrasound Service Engineering 4855 W. Electric Avenue Milwaukee, WI 53219 Applications Customer Answer Center 1-262-524-5698 Fax: +1-414-647-4125 Europe Tel: +49 212 2802 208 GE Ultraschall Deutschland GmbH& Co. KG +49 212 2802 207 BeethovenstraBe 239 Postfach 11 05 60, D-42665 Solingen Germany Fax: +49 212 2802 431 Tel: +65 291-8528 Asia (Singapore/ Japan) +81 426-482950 GE Ultrasound Asia Service Department - Ultrasound 298 Tiong Bahru Road #15-01/06 Central Plaza Fax: +65 272-3997 Singapore 169730 +81 426-482902 Chapter 1 Introduction 1-11

[Page 38] 1-5-2 System Manufacturer Table 1-7 System Manufacturer Manufacturer FAX Number GE Medical Systems - Americas P.O. Box 414 414-647-4090 Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201-0414 1-12 Section 1-5 - Customer Assistance

[Page 39] Chapter 2 Pre-Installation Section 2-1 Overview 2-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 2 This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare for the installation of a LOGIQ™ 9. Included are descriptions of the facility and electrical needs to be met by the purchaser of the unit. Table 2-1 Contents in Chapter 2 Section Description Page Number 2-1 Overview 2-1 2-2 General Console Requirements 2-2 2-3 Facility Needs 2-6 Chapter 2 Pre-Installation 2-1

[Page 40] Section 2-2 General Console Requirements 2-2-1 Console Environmental Requirements Table 2-2 Environmental Requirements Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Humidity Heat Dissipation o o o o 0 to 40 C ( 32 to 104 F) -40 to 70 C ( -40 to 158 F) < 90% rH non-condensing 3500 BTU pr hour 2-2-1-1 Cooling The cooling requirement for the LOGIQ™ 9 is 3500 BTU/hr. This figure does not include cooling needed for lights, people, or other equipment in the room. Each person in the room places an additional 300 BTU/hr. demand on the cooling system. 2-2-1-2 Lighting Bright light is needed for system installation, updates and repairs. However, operator and patient comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect. Therefore a combination lighting system (dim/bright) is recommended. Keep in mind that lighting controls and dimmers can be a source of EMI which could degrade image quality. These controls should be selected to minimize possible interference. 2-2-2 Electrical Requirements NOTE: GE Medical Systems requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system. Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live: The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral: The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. NOTE: Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit. 2-2-2-1 LOGIQ™ 9 Power Requirements Table 2-3 Electrical Specifications for LOGIQ™ 9 Voltage Tolerances Current Frequency 100-120 VAC ±10% 9.5 A 50-60 Hz 200-240 VAC ±10% 4.75 A 50-60 Hz 2-2-2-2 Inrush Current Inrush current is not a factor to consider due to the inrush current limiting properties of the power supplies. 2-2 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements

[Page 41] 2-2-2-3 Site Circuit Breaker It is recommended that the branch circuit breaker for the machine be readily accessible. CAUTION POWER OUTAGE MAY OCCUR. The LOGIQ™ 9 requires a dedicated single branch circuit. To avoid circuit overload and possible loss of critical care equipment, make sure you DO NOT have any other equipment operating on the same circuit. 2-2-2-4 Site Power Outlets A dedicated AC power outlet must be within reach of the unit without extension cords. Other adequate outlets for the external peripherals, medical and test equipment needed to support this unit must also be present within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the unit. Electrical installation must meet all current local, state, and national electrical codes. 2-2-2-5 Unit Power Plug If the unit arrives without a power plug, or with the wrong plug, you must contact your GE dealer or the installation engineer must supply what is locally required. 2-2-2-6 Power Stability Requirements Voltage drop-out Max 10 ms. Power Transients (All applications) Less than 25% of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond for any type of transient, including line frequency, synchronous, asynchronous, or aperiodic transients. Chapter 2 Pre-Installation 2-3

[Page 42] 2-2-3 EMI Limitations Ultrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies, magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. Ultrasound machines also generate EMI. The LOGIQ™ 9 complies with limits as stated on the EMC label. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. Possible EMI sources should be identified before the unit is installed. Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect. These sources include: • medical lasers, • scanners, • cauterizing guns, • computers, • monitors, • fans, • gel warmers, • microwave ovens, • light dimmers • portable phones. The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference. See Table 2-4 for EMI Prevention tips. Table 2-4 EMI Prevention/Abatement EMI Rule Details Keep the unit at least 5 meters or 15 feet away from other EMI sources. Special shielding may be Be aware of RF sources required to eliminate interference problems caused by high frequency, high powered radio or video broadcast signals. Poor grounding is the most likely reason a unit will have noisy images. Check grounding of the Ground the unit power cord and power outlet. After you finish repairing or updating the system, replace all covers and tighten all screws. Any Replace all screws, RF cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end. Install the shield over the gaskets, covers, cores front of card cage. Loose or missing covers or RF gaskets allow radio frequencies to interfere with the ultrasound signals. If more than 20% or a pair of the fingers on an RF gasket are broken, replace the gasket. Do not Replace broken RF gaskets turn on the unit until any loose metallic part is removed. Do not place labels where Never place a label where RF gaskets meet the unit. Otherwise, the gap created will permit RF RF gaskets touch metal leakage. Or, if a label has been found in such a position, move the label. Use GE specified harnesses The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding. Also, cable and peripherals length, material, and routing are all important; do not change from what is specified. Take care with cellular Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal; that could cause image artifacts. phones Do not allow cables to lie across the top of the card cage or hang out of the peripheral bays. Loop Properly dress peripheral the excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral bays. Attach the monitor cables to the cables frame. 2-4 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements

[Page 43] 2-2-4 Scan Probe Environmental Requirements Operation:10° to 40° C Storage:-20° to 50° C NOTE: Temperature in degrees C. Conversion to Degrees F = (Degrees C * 9/5) + 32). NOTICE SYSTEMS AND ELECTRONIC PROBES ARE DESIGNED FOR STORAGE TEMPERATURES OF -20 TO + 50 degrees C. WHEN EXPOSED TO LARGE TEMPERATURE VARIATIONS, THE PRODUCT SHOULD BE KEPT IN ROOM TEMPERATURE FOR 10 HOURS BEFORE USE. 2-2-5 Time and Manpower Requirements Site preparation takes time. Begin Pre-installation checks as soon as possible. If possible, allow six weeks before delivery, for enough time to make necessary changes. CAUTION Have two people available to deliver and unpack the LOGIQ™ 9. Attempts to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline by one person could result in injury or damage or both. Chapter 2 Pre-Installation 2-5

[Page 44] Section 2-3 Facility Needs 2-3-1 Purchaser Responsibilities The work and materials needed to prepare the site is the responsibility of the purchaser. Delay, confusion, and waste of manpower can be avoided by completing pre installation work before delivery. Use the Pre installation checklist to verify that all needed steps have been taken. Purchaser responsibility includes: • Procuring the materials required. • Completing the preparations before delivery of the ultrasound system. • Paying the costs for any alterations and modifications not specifically provided in the sales contract. NOTE: All electrical installations that are preliminary to the positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing must also be performed by qualified personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated and special engineering competence is required. All electrical work on these products must comply with the requirements of applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified personnel to perform electrical servicing on the equipment. The desire to use a non–listed or customer provided product or to place an approved product further from the system than the interface kit allows presents challenges to the installation team. To avoid delays during installation, such variances should be made known to the individuals or group performing the installation at the earliest possible date (preferably prior to the purchase). The ultrasound suite must be clean prior to delivery of the machine. Carpet is not recommended because it collects dust and creates static. Potential sources of EMI (electromagnetic interference) should also be investigated before delivery. Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact system reliability. 2-6 Section 2-3 - Facility Needs

[Page 45] 2-3-2 Required Features NOTE: GE Medical Systems requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system. Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live: The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral: The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. NOTE: Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit. • Door opening is at least 76 cm (30 in) wide. • Proposed location for unit is at least 0.3 m (1 ft.) from the wall for cooling • Power outlet and place for any external peripheral are within 2 m (6.5 ft) of each other with peripheral within 1 m of the unit to connect cables. NOTE: The LOGIQ™ 9 has four outlets inside the unit. One is for the monitor and three for on board peripherals. • Power outlets for other medical equipment and gel warmer • Power outlets for test equipment and modem within 1 m (3.2 ft) of unit • Clean and protected space to store transducers (in their cases or on a rack) • Material to safely clean probes (done with a plastic container, never metal) 2-3-3 Desirable Features • Door is at least 92 cm (3 ft.) wide • Circuit breaker for dedicated power outlet is easily accessible • Sink with hot and cold water • Receptacle for bio–hazardous waste, like used probe sheaths • Emergency oxygen supply • Storage for linens and equipment • Nearby waiting room, lavatory, and dressing room • Dual level lighting (bright and dim) • Lockable cabinet ordered by GE for its software and proprietary manuals Chapter 2 Pre-Installation 2-7

[Page 46] 2-3-4 Minimal Floor Plan Suggestion Figure 2-1 Minimal Floor Plan 2-8 Section 2-3 - Facility Needs

[Page 47] 2-3-5 Networking Pre-installation Requirements 2-3-5-1 Purpose of the DICOM Network Function DICOM services provide the operator with clinically useful features for moving images and patient information over a hospital network. Examples of DICOM services include the transfer of images to workstations for viewing or transferring images to remote printers. As an added benefit, transferring images in this manner frees up the on-board monitor and peripherals, enabling viewing to be done while scanning continues. With DICOM, images can be archived, stored, and retrieved faster, easier, and at a lower cost. 2-3-5-2 DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements To configure the LOGIQ™ 9 to work with other network connections, the site’s network administrator must provide some necessary information. Information must include: • A host name, local port number, AE Title, IP address and Net Mask for the LOGIQ™ 9. • The IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers at the site for ROUTING INFORMATION. • The host name, IP address, port and AE Title for each device the site wants connected to the LOGIQ™ 9 for DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION. A field for the make (manufacturer) and the revision of the device, is also included. This information may be useful for solving errors. Chapter 2 Pre-Installation 2-9

[Page 48] This page was intentionally left blank. 2-10 Section 2-3 - Facility Needs

[Page 49] Chapter 3 Installation Section 3-1 Overview 3-1-1 The Purpose of Chapter 3 This chapter contains information needed to install the unit. Included are procedures to receive, unpack and configure the equipment. Table 3-1 Contents in Chapter 3 Section Description Page Number 3-1 Overview 3-1 3-2 Installation Reminders 3-2 3-3 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment 3-4 3-4 Preparing for Installation 3-5 3-5 Completing the Installation 3-6 3-6 System Configuration 3-9 3-7 Available Probes 3-15 3-8 Software/Option Configuration 3-15 3-9 Connectivity Installation Worksheet 3-16 3-10 Before Starting a Software Upgrade 3-17 3-11 Loading Base Image Software 3-18 3-12 Loading Application Software 3-24 3-13 System Setup 3-28 3-14 Paperwork 3-30 Chapter 3 Installation 3-1

[Page 50] Section 3-2 Installation Reminders 3-2-1 Average Installation Time Table 3-2 Average Installation Time Description Average Installation Time Comments Unpacking the scanner 0.5 hours Scanner wo/options 0.5 hours Dependant on the required configuration DICOM Option 0.5 - 2.0 hours Dependant on the configuration amount 3-2-2 Installation Warnings 1.) Since the LOGIQ™ 9 weighs approximately 225 kg (500 lb.) without options, preferably two people should unpack it. Two people are also preferable for installing any additional items in excess of 35 pounds. 2.) There are no operator serviceable components. To prevent shock, do not remove any covers or panels. Should problems or malfunctions occur, unplug the power cord. Only qualified service personnel should carry out servicing and troubleshooting. 3.) After being transported, the unit may be very cold or hot. If this is the case, allow the unit to acclimate before you turn it on. It requires one hour for each 2.5°C increment it's temperature is below 10°C or above 40°C. CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Turning the system on without acclimation after arriving at site may cause the system to be damaged. Table 3-3 Acclimation Time ° C 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40 ° F 140 131 122 113 104 96 86 77 68 59 50 41 32 23 14 5 -4 -13 -22 -31 -40 hrs 8 6 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 3-2-2-1 Brake Pedal Operation WARNING WARNING REMEMBER: If the front caster swivel lock is engaged for transportation, pressing the release pedal once disengages the swivel lock. You must depress the release pedal a second time to engage the brake. 3-2-2-2 Operator I/O Panel Position If weight is placed on the Operator I/O Panel in it’s extended position the console could tip over. WARNING WARNING The system should NOT be moved with the Operator I/O Panel extended. Move the Operator I/O Panel to it’s centered and locked position. Lower the Operator I/O Panel as much as possible before moving the system. 3-2 Section 3-2 - Installation Reminders

[Page 51] 3-2-3 Safety Reminders DANGER WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS CAPABLE OF OPENING THE AC GROUND LINE (I.E., METER’S GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN), DON’T TOUCH THE UNIT! CAUTION Two people should unpack the unit because of its weight. Two people are required whenever a part weighing 19kg (35 lb.) or more must be lifted. CAUTION If the unit is very cold or hot, do not turn on its power until it has had a chance to acclimate to its operating environment. CAUTION To prevent electrical shock, connect the unit to a properly grounded power outlet. Do not use a three to two prong adapter. This defeats safety grounding. CAUTION Do NOT wear the ESD wrist strap when you work on live circuits and more than 30 V peak is present. CAUTION Do not use a 20 Amp to 15 Amp adapter on the 120 Vac unit’s power cord. This unit requires a dedicated 20 A circuit and can have a 15A plug if the on board peripherals do not cause the unit to draw more than 14.0 amps. CAUTION Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System performance and cooling require this. CAUTION OPERATOR MANUAL(S) The User Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ™ 9 and kept near the unit for quick reference. CAUTION ACOUSTIC OUTPUT HAZARD Although the ultrasound energy transmitted from the LOGIQ™ 9 probe is within FDA limits, avoid unnecessary exposure. Ultrasound energy can produce heat and mechanical damage. Figure 3-1 Environmental Labels Chapter 3 Installation 3-3

[Page 52] Section 3-3 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment CAUTION Have two people available to unpack the LOGIQ™ 9. Attempts to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline by one person could result in injury or damage or both. Table 3-4 Unpacking Procedure Step Task 1. Open the four hinges on each door 2. Remove the doors at both ends of the box 3. Place the front door against the rear edge of the pallet. The front door can be used as a ramp. Front Door Be sure to place the used as ramp. ramp (front door) as illustrated here. 4. Carefully remove the accessory box, and any other items, including the wooden shelf above the scanner’s keyboard and all the filling material, from the wooden box. 5. Press once on the swivel lock to release the brake. Swivel Lock Caution: Two people are needed in the next step due to the weight of the equipment. 6. Carefully move the scanner out of the wooden box, down the ramp. 7. Remove the clear plastic (wrapped around the scanner) from the unit. 3-4 Section 3-3 - Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment

[Page 53] Section 3-4 Preparing for Installation 3-4-1 Verify Customer Order Compare items received by the customer to that which is listed on the delivery order. Report any items that are missing, back ordered or damaged. 3-4-2 Physical Inspection 3-4-2-1 System Voltage Settings Verify that the scanner is set to the correct voltage. The Voltage settings for the LOGIQ™ 9 Scanner is found on a label to the right of the Power switch and External I/O, on the rear of the system. Figure 3-2 Rating Plate Example WARNING WARNING CONNECTING A LOGIQ™ 9 SCANNER TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL MOST LIKELY DESTROY THE SCANNER. 3-4-2-2 Video Formats Check that the video format is set to the locally used video standard, NTSC or PAL. 3-4-3 EMI Protection This unit has been designed to minimize the effects of Electo-Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many of the covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the system from image artifacts caused by this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and secured before the unit is put into operation. Chapter 3 Installation 3-5

[Page 54] Section 3-5 Completing the Installation 3-5-1 Power On / Boot Up NOTE: After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly. 3-5-1-1 Scanner Power On 1.) Connect the Power Cable to the back of the system. 2.) Ensure the Cable Clip slips securely over the shoulders on the molded plug. 3.) Connect the Main Power Cable to a hospital grade power receptacle with the proper rated voltage. Never use an adapter that would defeat the safety ground. 4.) Switch ON the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system. Circuit Breaker Cable Clip Mains Power Cable Figure 3-3 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner When power is applied to the scanner and the rear Circuit Breaker is turned ON, power is distributed to the Cooling Unit, Control Panel, Monitor, Internal and External I/O Boards, Peripherals and the Back- end Processor. NOTICE When AC power is applied to the scanner, the Standby switch on the Control panel illuminates amber, indicating the Back End Processor is in standby mode. 3-6 Section 3-5 - Completing the Installation

[Page 55] 3-5-1-2 Back-end Processor Boot Up Press the Standby switch on the Control Panel once. Standby Switch Figure 3-4 Standby Switch for Back-end Processor Boot Up When the Standby switch on the Control Panel is pressed once, the Back-end Processor starts and the software code is distributed to initiate the scanner. No status messages are displayed during this process. 3-5-2 Power Off/ Shutdown NOTE: After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly. 3-5-2-1 Back-end Processor Power Down 1.) Press the Standby switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu. 2.) Select Shutdown from the SYSTEM - EXIT menu. Figure 3-5 System Exit Menu for Back-end Processor Power Down Chapter 3 Installation 3-7

[Page 56] 3-5-2-2 Scanner Shutdown Circuit Breaker Cable Clip Mains Power Cable Figure 3-6 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner 1.) Switch OFF the Circuit Breaker at the back of the system. 2.) Disconnect the Mains Power Cable is necessary. For example: Relocating the scanner. NOTICE Disconnecting the Mains Power Cable before switching OFF the Circuit Breaker will activate the uninterruptible power system (UPS) in the backend processor, forcing an ordered shutdown of the system. NOTICE The UPS serves only as a battery backup that allows for a soft shut-down of the scanner to prevent file corruption. IT DOES NOT REGULATE INCOMING VOLTAGE . 3-5-3 Transducer Connection 1.) Connect a transducer to one of the three rightmost transducer receptacle as follows: A.) Ensure that the transducer twist lock lever to the horizontal position. B.) Insert the transducer connector on the receptacle guide pin until it touches the receptacle mating surface. C.) Twist the transducer twist lock lever to vertical position to lock it in place. Twist the lever to the horizontal position to disconnect the transducer. NOTE: It is not necessary to turn OFF power to connect or disconnect a transducer. 3-8 Section 3-5 - Completing the Installation

[Page 57] Section 3-6 System Configuration 3-6-1 System Specifications 3-6-1-1 Physical Dimensions Physical Dimensions of The physical dimensions of the LOGIQ™ 9 unit are summarized in Table 3-1 and Table 3-2. Table 3-1 lists the size of LOGIQ™ 9, with monitor and on-board peripherals. Table 3-1 Physical Dimensions of LOGIQ™ 9 Height Width Depth Minimum Maximum 140.3 cm / 55.25 inches 160.7 cm / 63.25 inches 64 cm / 25.2 inches 89.9 cm / 35.4 inches 3-6-1-2 Weight without Monitor and Peripherals Table 3-2 Weight of LOGIQ™ 9 With Monitor and Without Other Peripherals Model Weight [kg] Weight [lbs.] LOGIQ™ 9 196.8 434 3-6-1-3 Acoustic Noise Output: Less than 70dB(A) according to DIN 45635 - 19 - 01 - KL2. 3-6-2 Electrical Specifications Table 3-3 Electrical Specifications for LOGIQ™ 9 Voltage Tolerances Current Frequency 100-120 VAC ±10% 9.5 A 50-60 Hz 200-240 VAC ±10% 4.75 A 50-60 Hz 3-6-3 On-Board Optional Peripherals Table 3-4 Approved Peripherals Device Manufacturer Model Video Signal B/W Video Printer SONY UP-895MDW NTSC/PAL SVO-9500MD NTSC Video Cassette Recorder SONY SVO-9500-MDP PAL NOTE: There are no external peripheral options for the LOGIQ™ 9 Chapter 3 Installation 3-9

[Page 58] 3-6-4 External I/O Connector Panel Figure 3-7 External I/O Panel Labels .i.External I/O Connector Panel; 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Figure 3-8 External I/O Panel Connectors 3-10 Section 3-6 - System Configuration

[Page 59] 3-6-4External I/O Connector Panel (cont’d) Table 3-5 External I/O Connector Descriptions Item Connector Name Table Number Description 1 Audio Output (Left) RCA Phono Jack 2 Audio Output (Right) RCA Phono Jack 3 Trigger Output BNC Connector Hirose Electric Co. RM12BRB-5S, 4 Footswitch Table 3-12 Footswich transport shelf is in the back at the bottom 5 RS232 Com1 DSUB 9 pin male 6 Expose 1 Table 3-11 Mini-phone Jack 7 Expose 2 Table 3-11 Mini-phone Jack 8 Modem Connection Table 3-10 RJ-11 with global adapter kit for connection 9 Composite Video Out BNC Connector, Color Output 10 B/W Video Out BNC Connector, Black and White Output 11 S-Video Output Table 3-6 4 pin mini-DIN 12 S-VGA Output Table 3-7 DSUB-HD22 15 Pin female 13 USB (1) Table 3-8 14 Ethernet Connection Table 3-9 RJ-45 Connector Chapter 3 Installation 3-11

[Page 60] 3-6-4-1 External I/O Pin Outs Table 3-6 S-Video Connector, 4 Pin Pin No Output Signal Description 1 SVIDEO OUT/IN YG Y (Luma) GND 2 SVIDEO OUT/IN CG C (Chroma) GND 3 SVIDEO OUT/IN Y Y (Luma) SIGNAL 4 SVIDEO OUT/IN C C (Chroma) SIGNAL Table 3-7 S-VGA Connector, Shrinked Sub-D 15 Pin Pin No Output Signal Description 1 VGA OUT1 R Red 2 VGA OUT1 G Green 3 VGA OUT1 B Blue 4, 9,11,12,15 N/C N/C 5, 6, 7, 8, 10 GND GND 13 VGA OUT1 HS H Sync 14 VGA OUT1 VS V Sync Table 3-8 USB (A) Connector Pin No Output Signal Description 1 VCC USB Power Supply 2 - Data USB Data (-) 3 + Data USB Data (+) 4 GND USB Power Ground Table 3-9 Ethernet Connector, RJ45 Modular 8 Pin Pin No Output Signal Description 1 ETHER TD Ethernet RD+ 2 ETHER TD Ethernet RD- 3 ETHER RD Ethernet TD+ 6 ETHER RD Ethernet TD- Others NC Non-connection 3-12 Section 3-6 - System Configuration

[Page 61] 3-6-4-1External I/O Pin Outs (cont’d) Table 3-10 Modem, RJ11 Modular 6 Pin Pin No Output Signal Description 2 TEL L4 Telephone L4 3 TEL L2 Telephone L2 4 TEL L1 Telephone L1 5 TEL L3 Telephone L3 Others NC Non-connection Table 3-11 Remote Expose 1 & 2 Connectors Pin No Output Signal Description 1 SHUTTER/PRINT 2 Signal GND Table 3-12 Footswitch Connector Pin No Output Signal Description 1 Foot 1 2 Floating Ground 3 Foot 2 4 Floating Ground 5 Foot 3 Chapter 3 Installation 3-13

[Page 62] 3-6-5 Video Specification Video specifications may be needed to be able to connect laser cameras or other devices to the LOGIQ™ 9. Table 3-13 Video Specifications 1024x768 768x576 640x480 800x600 800x600 1024x768 Timing Parameter 75Hz 50Hz 60Hz 60Hz 75Hz 60Hz Horizontal Rate [kHz] 60.02 31.25 31.47 37.88 46.88 48.36 Horizontal Period [μ s] 16.66 32.00 31.78 26.40 21.33 20.68 Pixel Clock [MHz] 78.75 29.50 24.55 40.00 49.50 65.00 H Blank Width [μ s ] 3.66 5.97 5.70 6.40 5.17 4.92 H Sync Width [μ s ] 1.22 2.34 2.36 3.20 1.62 2.09 H Front Porch [μ s ] 0.20 0.75 0.73 1.00 0.32 0.37 Active Horizontal Period [μ s ] 13.00 26.03 26.07 20.00 16.16 15.75 Vertical Rate [Hz] 75.03 50.00 59.94 60.32 75.00 60.00 Vertical Period [ms] 13.33 20.00 16.68 16.58 13.33 16.67 V Sync Width [lines=ms] 32=0.53 49=1.57 45=1.43 28=0.74 25=0.53 38=0.79 V Front Porch [lines=μ s ] 3=50.00 5=160.00 6=190.70 4=105.60 3=64.00 6=124.10 Equalization Gate [lines=μ s ] 1=16.66 5=160.0 6=190.7 1=26.4 1=21.3 3=62.00 Lines: Field/Frame 800 625/625 525/525 628 625 806 Active Lines/Frame 768 576 480 600 600 768 3-14 Section 3-6 - System Configuration

[Page 63] Section 3-7 Available Probes See Specifications in the LOGIQ™ 9 User Reference Manual for probes and intended use. See Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts , for part numbers to be used when ordering new or replacement probes. Section 3-8 Software/Option Configuration Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System for information on configuring items like Hospital, Department, Language, Units (of measure), Date, Time and Date Format. For information on configuring Software Options, Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System. For information on configuring DICOM Connectivity, Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System. Chapter 3 Installation 3-15

[Page 64] Section 3-9 Connectivity Installation Worksheet Site System Information Floor: Comments: Site: Dept: Room: LOGIQ SN: Type: REV: CONTACT INFORMATION Name Title Phone E-Mail Address TCP/IP Settings Name - AE Title: IP Settings Remote Archive Setup IP Address: Remote Archive IP: Subnet Mask: Remote Archive Name: Default Gateway: Services (Destination Devices) Device Type Manufacturer Name IP Address Port AE Title 3-16 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Installation Worksheet

[Page 65] Section 3-10 Before Starting a Software Upgrade 3-10-1 Printers In R2.1.0 software and greater, if the customer has an HP990, HP970, UP-D50, UP-D895, UP-D21 or Talley printers, any settings they have made in the device driver, such as Gray Scale Images, will be lost. These printer settings will need to be recorded. You need to go to Utilities>Periperals>Printers in order to record the printer settings. 3-10-2 Save Connectivity Settings NOTE: DICOM TCPIP settings should not be deleted with the Base Image Load due to the use of upgrade scripts. However, It may be helpful to record this settings before proceeding in case an error occurs in the loading of software. NOTE: DICOM Workflows and DICOM Device Configurations are on the “D:” drive and will be saved when User Defined Cohfigurations are saved. If you want to Import exams back on to your system after the FMI, you should record any vital DICOM data before proceeding with this FMI or upgrading software. 1.) Select Utilities>Connectivity>TCPIP tab and record all information on that tab with particular attention to: - The “Enable DHCP” box should NOT be checked - Computer Name: ______________________________ - IP-Address: ______/________/_________/_________ - Subnet Mask: ______/________/________/________ - Remote Archive IP-Address: ______/________/_________/_________ - Remote Archive Name: ______________________________________ Chapter 3 Installation 3-17

[Page 66] WARNING WARNING The next steps will destroy ALLdata on the Scanner Section 3-11 Loading Base Image Software NOTE: While it is believed to be unnecessary, It would not hurt to disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers. NOTE: If the user has an HP990, HP970, UP-D50, UP-D895, UP-D21 or Talley printers, connect the printer and turn it on. If a printer is plugged in at this time it will automatically install and you won’t have to go back to windows to install it. NOTE: If the system has any digital peripherals, be sure that they are turned on. 1.) Insert the disk labeled “Base System Software Load Image” into the CDROM drive. 2.) Properly turn off the scanner by momentarily pressing the Standby (ON/OFF) Switch. Select Shutdown from the System Exit menu. Wait for the Standby Switch to turn amber. 3.) If the system will not shutdown normally, hold down the Standby Switch until the light turns from green to amber. Figure 3-9 Shutdown Dialog Box 4.) Turn on the scanner. You will see a message displayed on the Touch Panel screen as shown in Figure 3-10 on page 3-19 . 3-18 Section 3-11 - Loading Base Image Software

[Page 67] Figure 3-10 Base Load Warning Message Now is your chance to abort the Base Image load or continue. 5.) Press any key to continue. To abort, remove the CD-ROM from the drive and press CTRL-C . Chapter 3 Installation 3-19

[Page 68] Figure 3-11 Base Load Option Screen The first choice is to load the complete hard drive. 1.) Load the complete disk - All existing data will be lost. NOTE: APPLICATION SOFTWARE WILL NEED TO BE INSTALLED WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS COMPLETED. ALL PATIENT DATA (IF ANY) WILL BE DESTROYED! Figure 3-12 Base Load Option 1 Message Figure 3-12 is the last warning message before the complete base load process begins. Press any key to continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C . 3-20 Section 3-11 - Loading Base Image Software

[Page 69] The second choice is to load only the bootable portion of the hard drive partition, the “C” partition. This is not an option for a new hard drive that has not been previously partitioned for proper LOGIQ 9 operation. 2.) Select [2} Load the bootable C: partition only - Patient data is NOT lost. NOTE: DO NOT USE THIS OPTION ON A BRAND NEW SYSTEM. IT IS INTENDED FOR RECOVERY OF A SYSTEM THAT WILL NOT BOOT UP. APPLICATION SOFTWARE WILL NEED TO BE INSTALLED WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS COMPLETED. ALL PATIENT DATA IS PRESERVED. This selection will leave the remaining drive partitions intact. Table 3-14 LOGIQ 9 Drive Partition and Usage Drive Partition Usage C System Files and Applications D User Define and Presets E Patient Archive Data F File Swap Area Figure 3-13 Base Load Option 2 Message Figure 3-13 is the last warning message before the base load process begins. Press any key to continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C . The third choice, 3.) Exit to the A:\ prompt. Is intended for manufacturing use only. This is NOT an option as it is intended for manufacturing use only. If you select Option 3 by mistake, power cycle the system. Hold down the Standby switch until the light turns amber then turn the system back on. Chapter 3 Installation 3-21

[Page 70] Once you have chosen to continue with Option 1 or Option 2, you will see a screen showing Norton Ghost. This automatically loads a base set of software onto the hard disk. Let it run to completion (Approximately 8-10 mins). A message, as shown in Figure 3-14, will be displayed when the process is complete. Figure 3-14 Base Load Complete 4.) Remove the CD-ROM NOTE: Remove the CD-ROM from the drive; otherwise you will be repeating the Base System Software Load process when the system boots up. 5.) After removing the CDROM from the drive, properly turn off the scanner by holding down the Standby Switch until the light turns amber. 6.) Turn the scanner back on. It will now boot up and automatically log on to start checking hardware and mapping disk drives. This is a normal and should be allowed to run to completion. NOTE: While the script is running, several windows or dialog boxes will appear on the screen. At times it may look like the system is unresponsive. Wait for the “System Settings Change”dialog box “Do You Want to Restart computer now” to appear, approximately 3-4 minutes after the desktop is displayed. NOTE: Prior to the System Settings Change dialog box, Do NOT touch the system during this process. Activating the keyboard, mouse or front panel could corrupt the installation. 7.) When you get a message to restart Windows, select YES. 8.) Allow the system to reboot. 9.) The system will come up into the Windows mode. 3-22 Section 3-11 - Loading Base Image Software

[Page 71] 3-11-1 System Checks 1.) From the Windows mode display, double-click ( RIGHT SET key) on the My Computer icon. 2.) Check the drive letter assignments for the Compact Disk and Removable Disk. They should be Compact Disk (G) and Removable Disk (H). 3.) If the Drive letter assignments are properly mapped, proceed to loading applications software. If the assignments are reversed, proceed to remap the drives manually. 4.) If the customer has a USB (Digital Priters) to be install, plug it in now. The system is still in Windows mode and should recognize the printer and install the necessary driver. NOTE: If the printer is installed while in application mode, excessive CPU time will be consumed and the system will become very slow to unusable. Shutting down and rebooting will clear the condition. The printer will function correctly. Chapter 3 Installation 3-23

[Page 72] Section 3-12 Loading Application Software 3-12-1 Loading Applications Software NOTE: If you have not done so previously, double-click on the My Computer icon. Check for the drive letters assignments of the Removable Drive (MOD) and the CD-ROM Drive. If the CD-ROM Drive is not drive “g” and the MOD drive “h” , manually remap the drives. NOTE: When installing R2.1.1 software you may see error messages about not being able to replace the following *.dll files: ginastub.dll and msvcr70.dll . These are known, non-critical issues that are being tracked and will be fixed in the next revision of software. 1.) Place the “Application Software” CDROM into the CDROM drive. 2.) Select the START button on the tool bar at the bottom of the LCD screen and select “ Run… ”. 3.) Enter “ g:\LoadSoftware ” into the dialog box as shown in Figure 3-15. Figure 3-15 Run Load Software 4.) You will see a screen that warns you that you are about to load software, press the Enter key or select OK to start the process. 5.) You will see a Command (CMD) window open as shown in Figure 3-16. 3-24 Section 3-12 - Loading Application Software

[Page 73] Figure 3-16 Command Window 6.) As indicated, press any key to continue. The process is completely automated and provides you with messages as to its status. R2.1.1 Software provides the message in Figure 3-17. At this point you just have to wait while the software loads (Approximately 7-8 minutes). Figure 3-17 R2.1.1 Software Message NOTE: When the Information Window appears asking you to select OK, do nothing. This window will disappear automatically. Chapter 3 Installation 3-25

[Page 74] 7.) When the process has completed, the window will turn dark red and you will see the following message in Figure 3-18. Figure 3-18 Software Load Complete 8.) When it completes loading the system will reboot. If possible while the system is rebooting remove the CD from the drive. If the CD is remove the system will automatically reboot into the applications software. If you didn’t remove the CD, don’t worry you will get a dialog box as in Figure 3-19. Figure 3-19 Start Software 9.) REMOVE the Applications CD 10.)From the Start Applications dialog box, select START. 11.)Select CANCEL. 3-26 Section 3-12 - Loading Application Software

[Page 75] Figure 3-20 Enter Option String 12.)During the reboot process, the system may ask for the option string (valid license) to be entered. If this is necessary it will be included in the installation paperwork. NOTE: Starting with R3.x Software, all systems must have at least the basic option string in order for the software to run. Any single option string may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic & B-Flow). Demo option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo option string in a unit when it is sold to a customer. The current R3.x Demo Option String expires 31 January, 2005. Chapter 3 Installation 3-27

[Page 76] Section 3-13 System Setup 3-13-1 To Complete the System Setup 1.) From the Touch Screen on the scanner, select Utility>Connectivity>TCPIP Tab . 2.) Ensure that DHCP is deselected so you can enter information manually. 3.) Input the DICOM information. * This should be the appropriate DICOM information for the system if it is on the hospital network. If it is not correct, input the correct data. 4.) After all information is entered select SAVE SETTINGS. 5.) iLinq Checkout will need to be completed again. refer to the iLinq Installation Manual. 3-13-2 VCR Setup 1.) Reset the VCR and choose a Default Line Printer by going to Utilities>System>Peripherals . 2.) Under VCR, Select Sony 9500 VCR and SAVE 3.) Under SETUP, Select the desired default line printer and SAVE 4.) Select Exit in the lower left-hand corner of the Touch Screen. 3-13-3 Printer Setup 1.) If the customer has a USB (Digital) Printer plug it in now. The system is in Windows mode it should recognize the printer and install the necessary driver. 2.) If you do not install the printer until after the Applications software has been loaded, you will need a service dongle to get into windows and follow the manual set up procedures in the LOGIQ™ 9 Peripheral Installation Manual 2341053-100. 3-13-4 Print Key Assignment and Checkout Because of the addition of more printer choices, digital and analog, the factory default print key configuration has been removed for the color and b/w printers. 1.) Determine which printers are configured on the system. The former factory defaults were Color = P3 and B/W = P2. 2.) Consult the customer to ensure which “Print” keys (P1-4) should be assigned to printers. 3.) Select Utility > Admin > Connectivity > Buttons >. Choose the desired print button. Under “Destinations”, select necessary printer choice from the drop-down list. 4.) Press the print key just configured and you should get a printout of the screen. 3-28 Section 3-13 - System Setup

[Page 77] 3-13-5 Restore Patient, Report, and User-Defined Presets 1.) Place the Backup/Restore media (MOD or CD-R) in the drive. 2.) Select the UTILITY tab on the Touch Panel. Select SYSTEM, then BACKUP/RESTORE. 3.) Select everything under Restore by placing a check mark after Patient Archive, Report Archive, System Configuration, and User Defined Configuration. Then press RESTORE. 3-13-6 Cycle System Power 1.) Do an auto-shut down 2.) Press the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu. 3.) Select SHUTDOWN from the SYSTEM - EXIT menu. Figure 3-21 System Exit Menu for Back-end Processor Power Down 4.) Power up the system for functional check-out. Chapter 3 Installation 3-29

[Page 78] Section 3-14 Paperwork NOTE: During and after installation, the documentation (i.e. User Manuals, Installation Manuals...) for the peripheral units must be kept as part of the original system documentation. This will ensure that all relevant safety and user information is available during the operation and service of the complete system. 3-14-1 Product Locator Installation NOTE: The Product Locator Installation Card shown may not be same as the provided Product Locator card. Figure 3-22 Product Locator Installation Card 3-14-2 User Manual(s) Check that the correct User Manual(s) for the system and software revision, is included with the installation. Specific language versions of the User Manual may also be available. Check with your GE Sales Representative for availability. 3-30 Section 3-14 - Paperwork

[Page 79] Chapter 4 Functional Checks Section 4-1 Overview 4-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 4 This chapter provides procedures for quickly checking major functions of the LOGIQ™ 9 scanner diagnostics by using the built-in service software, and power supply adjustments. Table 4-1 Chapter 4 Contents Section Description Page Number 4-1 Overview 4-1 4-2 Required Equipment 4-1 4-3 General Procedure 4-2 4-4 Software Configuration Checks 4-20 4-5 Peripheral Checks 4-21 4-6 Mechanical Function Checks 4-22 4-7 Site Log 4-24 NOTICE Most of the information pertaining to this Functional Checks chapter is found in the LOGIQ™ 9 Quick Guide (Direction number 2309820-100). Section 4-2 Required Equipment • An empty (blank) MO Disk. • At least one transducer. See “Probes” on page 1-41. for an overview. (normally you should check all the transducers used on the system) Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-1

[Page 80] Section 4-3 General Procedure CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS Operate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes. NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts: Unplug the system Maintain control of the system power plug Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge 7$*   /2&.287 6LJQHG 'DWH Beware that some parts of the system may be energized even if the power is turned off but the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet. 4-3-1 Power On / Boot Up NOTE: After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly. 4-3-1-1 Scanner Power On 1.) Connect the Power Cable to the back of the system. 2.) Ensure the Cable Clip slips securely over the shoulders on the molded plug. 3.) Connect the Power Cable to an appropriate mains power outlet. 4.) Switch ON the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system. Circuit Breaker Cable Clip Mains Power Cable Figure 4-1 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner When power is applied to the scanner and the rear Circuit Breaker is turned ON, power is distributed to the Cooling Unit, Control Panel, Monitor, Internal and External I/O Boards, Peripherals and the Back- end Processor. NOTICE When AC power is applied to the scanner, the Standby switch on the Control panel illuminates amber, indicating the Backend Processor is in standby mode. 4-2 Section 4-3 - General Procedure

[Page 81] 4-3-1-2 Back-end Processor Boot Up Press the Standby switch on the Control Panel once. Standby Switch Figure 4-2 Standby Switch for Back-end Processor Boot Up When the Standby switch on the Control Panel is pressed once, the Back-end Processor starts and the software code is distributed to initiate the scanner. No status messages are displayed during this process. 4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown NOTE: After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly. 4-3-2-1 Back End Processor Power Off 1.) Press the Standby switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu. 2.) Select Shutdown from the SYSTEM - EXIT menu. 3.) Wait for the system to properly close all files and shutdown. Figure 4-3 System Exit Menu for Back-end Processor Power Down Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-3

[Page 82] 4-3-2-2 Scanner Shutdown Circuit Breaker Cable Clip Mains Power Cable Figure 4-4 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner 1.) From the rear of the system. switch OFF the Circuit Breaker. 2.) Disconnect the Mains Power Cable by unfastening the metal wire fastener. NOTICE Disconnecting the Mains Power Cable before switching OFF the Circuit Breaker will activate the uninterruptible power system (UPS) in the Back End Processor, forcing an ordered shutdown of the system. 4-4 Section 4-3 - General Procedure

[Page 83] 4-3-3 System Features 4-3-3-1 Control Panel 15 2 1 5 8 10 9 12 Figure 4-5 Control Panel Tour 1.) Touch Panel and Controls 2.) Touch Panel Brightness Control 3.) Video 4.) Audio On/Off and Volume 5.) TGC 6.) Reverse 7.) Additional Feature Keys 8.) Keyboard 9.) Mode/Gain Keys 10.)Imaging/Measurement Keys 11.)Depth 12.)Imaging Feature Keys 13.)Freeze and Print Keys 14.)Probe Holder 15.)Gel Holder 16.)Standby Switch Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-5

[Page 84] 4-3-3-2 Touch Panel 6 7 Figure 4-6 Touch Panel Display Tour 1.) Patient: Enter Patient screen 2.) Scan: Enter scanning mode screen 3.) Reports: Activates default report and Touch Panel of report choices. 4.) End Exam: Activates Image Management and Touch Panel with end of exam options. 5.) Utility: Activates the configuration system. 6.) Preset: Select the application to use. 7.) Probe Indicator: Indicates and selects the probes. NOTE: Different menus are displayed depending on which Touch Panel Menu is selected. At the bottom of the Touch Panel, there are five combination rotary dials/push buttons. The functionality of these rotaries changes, depending upon the currently displayed menu. Press the button to switch between controls (as with Focus Position/Number), or rotate the dial to adjust the value. 4-6 Section 4-3 - General Procedure

[Page 85] 4-3-3-3 Monitor Display 1 2 3 4 12 10 17 19 20 21 22 Figure 4-7 Monitor Display Tour Table 4-2 Monitor Display Features 1. Institution/Hospital Name, Date, Time, Operator 12. Probe Identifier. Exam Study. Identification. 2. Patient Name, Patient Identification. 13. Imaging Parameters by Mode (current mode highlighted). 3. Power Output Readout, System Status (real-time or frozen) 14. Focal Zone. 4. GE Symbol: Probe Orientation Marker. Coincides with a 15. TGC. probe orientation marking on the probe. 5. Image Preview. 16. Body Pattern. 6. Gray/Color Bar. 17. Depth Scale. 7. Cine Gauge. 18. Image Management Menu: Menu, Delete, and Image Manager. 8. Measurement Summary Window. 19. Image Palette. 9. Image. 20. Caps Lock: On/Off. 10. Measurement. 21. System Messages Display. 11. Results Window. 22. Trackball Functionality Status: Scroll, M&A (Measurement and Analysis), Position, Size, Scan Area Width and Tilt. Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-7

[Page 86] 4-3-4 System B/M-Mode Checks For a basic functional check of the system’s different modes, the Quick Guide will familiarize you with image optimization for B-Mode , M-Mode , Color Flow , and Doppler . Figure 4-8 Table 4-3 B/M-Mode Functions Optimizes image quality and allows user to reduce beam Power Output (Acoustic Power) intensity. 10% increments between 0-100%. Values greater than 0.1 are displayed Dynamic Range controls how echo intensities are converted to Dynamic Range shades of gray, thereby increasing the adjustable range of contrast. Increases the number of transmit focal zones or moves the focal zone(s) so that you can tighten up the beam for a specific Focus Number and Position area. A graphic caret corresponding to the focal zone position(s) appears on the right edge of the image. Selects a level below which echoes will not be amplified (an Rejection echo must have a certain minimum amplitude before it will be processed). Edge Enhance brings out subtle tissue differences and boundaries by enhancing the gray scale differences Edge Enhance corresponding to the edges of structures. Adjustments to M Mode's edge enhancement affects the M Mode only. Temporal filter that averages frames together. This has the Frame Average effect of presenting a smoother, softer image. Enables gray scale image colorization. To deactivate, reselect Colorize a Gray Map. Determines how the echo intensity levels received are Gray Map presented as shades of gray. Rotation (Up/Down) Rotates the image by selecting the value from the pop up menu. Multi Frequency mode lets you downshift to the probe's next lower Frequency frequency or shift up to a higher frequency. 4-8 Section 4-3 - General Procedure

[Page 87] Table 4-3 B/M-Mode Functions Optimizes B Mode frame rate or spatial resolution for the best Frame Rate/Resolution possible image. Provides intuitive representation of non-quantitative B Flow hemodynamics in vascular structures. Sensitivity/PRI Adjusts the sample rate for the flow signal. Background On lets you view the anatomy roadmap; Background On/Off Background Off lets you view just flow information. Sweep Speed Changes the speed at which the timeline is swept. 4-3-5 System CFM and PWD Checks Figure 4-9 CFM and PWD Functions Table 4-4 CFM and PWD Functions Adjusts the baseline to accommodate faster or slower blood Baseline flows to eliminate aliasing. Velocity scale determines pulse repetition frequency. If the sample volume gate range exceeds single gate PRF capability, PRF/Wall Filter the system automatically switches to high PRF mode. Multiple gates appear, and HPRF is indicated on the display. Estimates the flow velocity in a direction at an angle to the Angle Correct Doppler vector by computing the angle between the Doppler vector and the flow to be measured Threshold assigns the gray scale level at which color Threshold information stops. Allows a specific color map to be selected. After a selection has Map been made, the color bar displays the resultant map. Allows blood flow to be viewed from a different perspective, i.e. Invert red away (negative velocities) and blue toward (positive velocities). The real-time or frozen image can be inverted. Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-9

[Page 88] Table 4-4 CFM and PWD Functions Controls the number of samples gathered for a single color flow Packet Size vector. Quick Angle Correct Quickly adjusts the angle by 60 degrees Display layout can be preset to have B-Mode and Time-motion side-by-side or over-under. In the side-by-side layout, there are three display alternatives Doppler Display Formats defined: equal priority, time-motion priority or time-motion with B-Mode reference. In the over-under layout, there are three display alternatives defined: time-motion priority, B Mode priority or equal priority. Sample Volume Gate Length Sizes the sample volume gate Slants the B-Mode or Color Flow linear image left or right to get Scan Area more information without moving the probe 4-3-6 Basic Measurements NOTE: The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press Freeze . 4-3-6-1 Distance and Tissue Depth Measurements 1.) Press MEASURE once; an active caliper displays. 2.) To position the active caliper at the start point (distance) or the most anterior point (tissue depth), move the TRACKBALL . 3.) To fix the start point, press Set . The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper. 4.) To position the second active caliper at the end point (distance) or the most posterior point (tissue depth), move the TRACKBALL . 5.) To complete the measurement, press SET . The system displays the distance or tissue depth value in the measurement results window. Before you complete a measurement: To toggle between active calipers, press MEASURE . To erase the second caliper and the current data measured and start the measurement again, press CLEAR once. NOTE: To rotate through and activate previously fixed calipers, turn CURSOR SELECT . NOTE: After you complete the measurement, to erase all data that has been measured to this point, but not data entered onto worksheets, press CLEAR . 4-3-6-2 Circumference/Area (Ellipse) Measurement 1.) Press MEASURE once; an active caliper displays. 2.) To position the active caliper, move the TRACKBALL . 3.) To fix the start point, press SET . The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper. 4.) To position the second caliper, move the TRACKBALL . 5.) Turn the ELLIPSE control; an ellipse with an initial circle shape appears. 4-10 Section 4-3 - General Procedure

[Page 89] 4-3-6-2Circumference/Area (Ellipse) Measurement (cont’d) NOTE: Be careful not to press the Ellipse control as this activates the Body Pattern. 6.) To position the ellipse and to size the measured axes (move the calipers), move the TRACKBALL . 7.) To increase the size, turn the ELLIPSE control in a clockwise direction. To decrease the size, turn the ELLIPSE control in a counterclockwise direction. 8.) To toggle between active calipers, press MEASURE . 9.) To complete the measurement, press SET . The system displays the circumference and area in the measurement results window. Before you complete a measurement: - To erase the ellipse and the current data measured, press CLEAR once. The original caliper is displayed to restart the measurement. - To exit the measurement function without completing the measurement, press CLEAR a second time. 4-3-6-3 Worksheets Measurement/Calculation worksheets are available to display and edit measurements and calculations. There are generic worksheets as well as Application specific worksheets. The worksheets are selected from the Measurement Touch Panel. 4-3-6-4 Report Pages Measurements/Calculations that are included on the worksheet can also be displayed on Report Pages. Report Pages can be customized to meet the appropriate needs of the user. 4-3-7 Probe/Connectors Usage 4-3-7-1 Connecting a probe 1.) Place the probe's carrying case on a stable surface and open the case. 2.) Carefully remove the probe and unwrap the probe cable. 3.) DO NOT allow the probe head to hang free. Impact to the probe head could result in irreparable damage. 4.) Turn the connector locking handle counterclockwise. 5.) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place. 6.) Turn the connector locking handle clockwise to secure the probe connector. 7.) Carefully position the probe cable in the probe cord holder spot so it is free to move, but not resting on the floor. 4-3-7-2 Activating the probe Select the appropriate probe from the probe indicators on the Touch Panel. The probe activates in the currently-selected operating mode. The probe's default settings for the mode and selected exam are used automatically. Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-11

[Page 90] 4-3-7-3 Deactivating the probe When deactivating the probe, the probe is automatically placed in standby mode. 1.) Press the Freeze key. 2.) Gently wipe the excess gel from the face of the probe. (Refer to the Basic User Manual for complete probe cleaning instructions.) 3.) Carefully slide the probe around the right side of the keyboard, toward the probe holder. Ensure that the probe is placed gently in the probe holder. 4-3-7-4 Disconnecting the probe Probes can be disconnected at any time. However, the probe should not be selected as the active probe. 1.) Move the probe locking handle counterclockwise. Pull the probe and connector straight out of the probe port. 2.) Carefully slide the probe and connector away from the probe port and around the right side of the keyboard. Ensure the cable is free. 3.) Be sure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage box. 4-3-8 Using Cine 4-3-8-1 Activating CINE Press FREEZE , then roll the TRACKBALL to activate CINE. To start CINE Loop playback, press Run/ Stop. To stop CINE Loop playback. press Run/Stop. 4-3-8-2 Omitting Images TRACKBALL to the frame you want to delete and press OMIT IMAGE. 4-3-8-3 Restoring Images To undo deleting an image from the CINE Loop, press RESTORE IMAGE. 4-3-8-4 Quickly Move to Start/End Frame Press FIRST to move to the first CINE frame; press LAST to move to the last CINE frame. 4-3-8-5 Start Frame/End Frame Turn the START FRAME dial to the left to move to the beginning of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial to the right to move forward through the CINE Loop. Turn the END FRAME dial to the right to move to the end of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial to the left to move backward through the CINE Loop. 4-12 Section 4-3 - General Procedure

[Page 91] 4-3-8-6 Adjusting the CINE Loop Playback Speed Turn the LOOP SPEED dial right/left to increase/decrease the CINE Loop playback speed. 4-3-8-7 Synchronizing Multiple CINE Loops To synchronize two or more CINE Loops, press SYNC MODE. 4-3-8-8 Disconnecting B-Mode CINE from Timeline CINE To review the B-Mode CINE Loop only, press CINE MODE SELECTION and select B ONLY. To review the Timeline CINE Loop only, press CINE MODE SELECTION and select TL ONLY. To return to linked B-Mode and Timeline CINE Loop review, press CINE MODE SELECTION and select B/TL. 4-3-8-9 Moving through a CINE Loop Frame By Frame Turn FRAME BY FRAME to move through CINE memory one frame at a time. 4-3-9 Image Management (QG) For Image Management functionality refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Quick Guide. It talks about several topics: • Clipboard • Printing Images • Browsing and Managing an Exam’s Stored Image • Connectivity, and Dataflow Concept and Creation • Starting an Exam • Configuring Connectivity • TCP/IP • Services (Destinations) • Buttons • Views • Verifying and Pinging a Device Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-13

[Page 92] 4-3-10 Using the MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive) The 3.5 inch Magneto-Optical disk drive supports the following densities: Standard : 640MB; 540MB; 230MB; and 128MB Overwrite : 640MB; and 540MB Magneto-Optical Drive (MOD) Eject Button Figure 4-10 Magneto-Optical Drive 1.) Before installing an MO disk in the MOD, check the MO disk for loose hardware or damaged labels which could jam inside the MOD. Also, ensure that the slide switch in one corner of the disk is set so that the disk is write enabled (disk hole closed). 2.) Insert the disk into the MOD with the label facing up. NOTICE Never move the unit with a disk in the MOD because the drive actuator will not be locked and the MOD could break. 3.) There are different methods to eject a disk from the MOD. In some cases disk ejection is automatic. Manual ejection methods are listed below in preferred order from best (1) to worst (4). a.) When in Archive Menu, use the softkey choice –or– click Image Presets up, then click the left softkey switch up for ARCHIVE, then toggle the switch under EJECT MOD. b.) Press the EJECT switch on the MOD while system is ON. c.) Press and hold the EJECT switch while the system is booting. d.) Mechanical ejection. Insert the end of a paper clip into the hole next to the EJECT switch while system power is OFF. NOTICE Avoid mechanical ejection whenever possible. Mechanical ejection leaves the actuator unlocked and the MOD susceptible to damage if moved. If forced to use this method, reboot the system, then insert and eject a known good disk using one of the other manual ejection methods. 4-14 Section 4-3 - General Procedure

[Page 93] 4-3-11 Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images 4-3-11-1 Formatting Media 1.) To format the backup media, CD-ROM or MOD, select the UTILITY tab on the Touch Panel. 2.) Select CONNECTIVITY, then TOOLS. Properly label and Insert the backup media. 3.) Select the media type from the drop down menu. 4.) Enter the label for the media as shown in Figure 4-11. It is best to use all capital letters with no spaces or punctuation marks. Verify Format Media Selection Media Label Format Figure 4-11 Format and Verify Media 5.) The Ultrasound system displays a pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 4-12. When the formatting has been completed, press OK to continue. 6.) If desired, verify that the format was successful by returning to Utility>Connectivity>Tools and selecting VERIFY as shown in Figure 4-11. Figure 4-12 Format Successful Pop-up Menu Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-15

[Page 94] 4-3-11-2 Backup System Presets and Configurations NOTE: Always backup any preset configurations before a software reload. This ensures that if the presets need to be reloaded, after the software update, they will be the same ones the customer was using prior to service. 1.) Insert a formatted MOD (Magneto-Optical Disk) or CD-R into the drive. 2.) On the Touch Panel, press UTILITY. 3.) On the Utility Touch Panel, press SYSTEM. 4.) On the monitor display, select BACKUP/RESTORE. NOTE: If you are not logged in as GE Service or with administrator privileges, the Operator Login window is displayed. Log on with administrator privileges. 5.) In the Backup list, select Patient Archive, Report Archive, System Configuration and User Defined Configuration. 6.) In the Media field, select MO or CD-RW. 7.) Select BACKUP. The system performs the backup. As it proceeds, status information is displayed on the Backup/Restore screen. Check here to backup presets and configurations Figure 4-13 Backup/Restore Menu 4-16 Section 4-3 - General Procedure

[Page 95] 4-3-11-3 Restore System Presets and Configurations The restore procedure overwrites the existing database on the local hard drive. Make sure to insert CAUTION the correct MOD or CD-R. 1.) Insert the Backup/Restore MOD (Magneto-Optical Disk) or CD-R into the drive. 2.) On the Touch Panel, press UTILITY. 3.) On the Utility Touch Panel, press SYSTEM. 4.) On the monitor display, select BACKUP/RESTORE. NOTE: If you are not logged in with administrator privileges, the Operator Login window is displayed. Log on with administrator privileges. 5.) In the Restore list, select Patient Archive, Report Archive, System Configuration and User Defined Configuration. 6.) In the Media field, select the Backup/Restore MOD or CD-RW. 7.) Select RESTORE. The system performs the restore. As it proceeds, status information is displayed on the Backup/Restore screen. Check here to restore presets and configurations Figure 4-14 Backup/Restore Menu Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-17

[Page 96] 4-3-11-4 Archiving Images 1.) Insert the archive media. To format the archive media, CD-ROM or MOD, select the Utility tab on the Touch Panel. 2.) Select Connectivity, then Tools. 3.) Format the MOD/CD-ROM. Verify the format if desired. 4.) Images will be moved from the hard drive by date. Therefore, the best way is to label media by date. NOTE: Images will be moved from the hard drive by date. Therefore, the best way to label media is by date. When images are moved to the archive media, they will be deleted from the system hard drive. However, the patient database (backed up earlier) maintains pointers to the location of the images on the archive media. Verify Format Media Selection Media Label Format Figure 4-15 Format MOD/CD-ROM Screen 5.) Press PATIENT and set the Dataflow to store images directly to MOD or CD-ROM. 6.) From the image screen, press MORE, then select Move Images. The Move Images pop-up appears. 4-18 Section 4-3 - General Procedure

[Page 97] 4-3-11-4Archiving Images (cont’d) Figure 4-16 Image Archive Move Pop-up Menu 7.) Fill in the From Date and To Date . Specify to Keep days together . 8.) Press RECALCULATE. 9.) Press OK. An in-progress message appears. The archive operation is complete when you receive the message shown in Figure 4-17. Figure 4-17 Archive Operation Complete Message 10.)Repeat the image move steps until all images have been archived. All databases, presets and images should now be saved to removable media. Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-19

[Page 98] 4-3-12 ECG Check Out (this option is currently not available on the LOGIQ™ 9 Connect the ECG Harness and check: Table 4-5 ECG Harness Check Step Task to do Expected Result(s) Connect the ECG at the Connector on the Front of the It will display a curve along the bottom edge of the image 1. scanner. sector Section 4-4 Software Configuration Checks Table 4-6 Software Configuration Checks Step Task to do Expected Result(s) 1. Check Date and Time setting Date and Time are correct 2. Check that Location (Hospital Name) is correct Location Name is correct 3. Check Language settings Desired Language is displayed 4. Check assignment of Printer Keys Print1-4 Keys are assigned as desired by the customer 5. Check that all of the customer’s options are set up correct All authorized functions are enabled 4-20 Section 4-4 - Software Configuration Checks

[Page 99] Section 4-5 Peripheral Checks Check that peripherals work as described below: Table 4-7 Peripheral Checks Step Task to do Expected Result(s) 1. Press ( FREEZE ) Stop image acquisition. Press ( PRINT 1 ) or ( PRINT 2 ) on the Control The image displayed on the screen is printed on B&W or Color printer, 2. Panel depending on the key assignment configuration 3. Press VIDEO on the Control Panel. To start the video counter at a different point: 4. Press UPDATE MENU in the Trackball area. The Video Set Counter / Search Dialog window is displayed Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter 5. Number appears the counter number in the counter field. 6. Press SET COUNTER to save the change. Number is saved 7. Press VIDEO on the Control Panel to return to the scanning mode to Start Recording 8. Press REC/PAUSE on the Control panel. A red dot is displayed in the VCR status area on the Title bar to indicate that recording has begun To Stop recording 9. Press REC/PAUSE on the Control panel. The video status icon is changed to (Pause) Press VIDEO on the Control Panel and the 10. To start, Play back an examination assignable play to perform actions on the recorded session, such as stop, pause, rewind Use the Assignable keys on the Control 11. or fast forward. Panel The video status icon in updated accordingly. While in playback mode, use the 12. TRACKBALL to adjust the video playback To search on the tape speed and scroll through the record. 13. Press the assignable PAUSE to stop the tape at the desired frame. part of it can be stored on the computer’s memory as a cineloop.The 14. When playing back an examination cineloop enables the user to perform further operations on the stored section (see for further information on cineloop operation). Press ( FREEZE ) while playing back a To store a recorded sequence as a cineloop. The last few seconds are 15. recorded session. stored as a cineloop. Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-21

[Page 100] Section 4-6 Mechanical Function Checks 4-6-1 Operator I/O Movement Figure 4-18 Step Task Expected Result(s) 1. Pull handle up under the platform towards you to It is possible to maneuver the Display Platform release horizontal lock horizontally at present level of height 2. It is possible to maneuver the Display Platform up and Pull handle at left hand grip towards you to release down (between the vertical end stops) as long as you the Vertical Lock pull the handle towards you 3. It is possible to maneuver the Display Platform both Pull both handles towards you to release both horizontally and vertically as long as you keep pulling Vertical and Horizontal locks these handles towards you Table 4-8 Display Platform Maneuverability Checks 4-22 Section 4-6 - Mechanical Function Checks

[Page 101] 4-6-2 Brakes and Direction Locks Checks Check that the brakes and direction locks function as described below. Table 4-9 Brakes and Direction Lock Instructions Step Task Expected Result(s) 1. Press on pedal no. 2 To engage the brakes in full lock 2. Press on pedal no.1 To release the brake 3. Press on pedal no.1 To engage swivel lock. You may need to move the system around a little to get the wheels to lock into the locked direction. 4. Press on pedal no. 2 To release swivel lock NOTE: The swivel lock and brake cannot be engaged (pressed down) at the same time since pressing the main brake releases the swivel lock and pressing the swivel lock releases the main brake. Therefore, if the swivel lock is engaged you need to press the main brake pedal (#2) twice to lock the scanner from rolling. Once will release the swivel lock and once again will engage the main brake in full lock as stated in step 1. Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-23

[Page 102] Section 4-7 Site Log Table 4-10 Site Log Date Service person Problem Comments 4-24 Section 4-7 - Site Log

[Page 103] Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) Section 5-1 Overview 5-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 5 This chapter explains LOGIQ™ 9’s system concepts, component arrangement, and subsystem function. It also describes the Power Distribution System (PDS) and probes. Table 5-1 Contents in Chapter 5 Section Description Page Number 5-1 Overview 5-1 5-2 General Information 5-2 5-3 Front End Processor 5-5 5-4 Back End Processor (BEP) 5-20 5-6 Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ™ 9) 5-33 5-7 Internal I/O 5-34 5-8 Top Console 5-42 5-9 Monitor 5-43 5-10 External I/O 5-43 5-11 Peripherals 5-46 5-12 Modem 5-47 5-13 Power Distribution 5-49 5-14 Mechanical Descriptions 5-54 5-15 Air Flow Control 5-55 5-16 Service Platform 5-55 Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-1

[Page 104] Section 5-2 General Information LOGIQ™ 9 is a phased and linear array ultrasound imaging scanner. It has provisions for analog input sources like ECG and Phono. A Doppler probe may also be connected and used. The system can be used for: - 2D Gray Scale and 2D Color Flow Imaging - M-Mode Gray Scale Imaging - Color M-Mode - Doppler - Different combinations of the above modes LOGIQ™ 9 is a digital beamforming system. Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End Electronics, to the Back-End Processor, and finally displayed on the monitor and peripherals. System configuration is stored on the hard drive and all necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up. Name Plate Monitor Monitor Controls Op. Panel Upper Bezel Gel Warmer Touchscreen/Display TGC Slidepot Knobs Operator Console Front Cover B/W Printer VCR ECG Module 3.5” MOD Probe Connector CD-ROM Backend Processor Chassis Swivel Lock & Front Bumper Brake Release Brake & Swivel Release Figure 5-1 LOGIQ™ 9 Major Components 5-2 Section 5-2 - General Information

[Page 105] 5-2-1 Block Diagram BACK END PROCESSOR USER INTERFACE ECG Patient Interface AC POWER 3.5" MOD OP I/O PANEL 17" Monitor UPS Hard Drive CD-ROM ATX POWER SUPPLY POWER ON/OFF (RESET*) PC MOTHERBOARD SONY COLOR PRINTER FLOCK UP-2900MD AGP PCI SOUND OF PC2IP Ethernet PCVIC PC2IO VIDEO VIDEO CARD BIRDS (optional) SONY VCR SVO-9500MD SONY B/W PRINTER UP-890MD Video Outputs Network Connection USB Connection FRONT END PROCESSOR PROBES FRONT END BACKPLANE DOPPLER INTERNAL I/O EXTERNAL I/O XDIF RFAMP TD0 TD1 TD2 TD3 TD4 TD5 TD6 TD7 EQ4 BMP SCB FEPS PCI CABLE FRONTPLANE AC CONTROLLER MODEM XFMR BOX 230Vac TO MODEM 230Vac 115Vac 115Vac TO MONITOR TO CARD RACK 230Vac TO PC 230Vac TO PERIPHERIALS 115 or 230Vac TO OUTLET Figure 5-2 LOGIQ™ 9 Simple Block Diagram Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-3

[Page 106] 5-2-2 Dataflow Control Description 5-2-2-1 Data Sets Each scan mode will produce data to a corresponding data set in the Image Memory. The data sets are represented in ring-buffers. Each active data set will be allocated to one of the following types of acquisition data: • 2-D tissue data • Doppler data • M-mode data • 2-D Color flow • Trace data • Video Y-component data • Video UV-component data • Color M-mode data • RF data 5-4 Section 5-2 - General Information

[Page 107] Section 5-3 Front End Processor The Front End Processor generates the strong bursts transmitted by the probes as ultrasound into the body. It also receives weak ultrasound echoes from blood cells and body structure, amplifies these signals and converts them to a digital signal. Equalization B Mode Processor I,Q Barrel Shift NCO FIR I,Q Synthetic Axial Interp Vector Smoothing Digital Gain Aperture Detector Compound Filter XDIF Pulser TD Rate Dynamic T/R Switch TGC Gen I2C Master Converter Range Probe Rigel Port MUX A/D XDIF Power Supply Temperature Edge Focal B Mode Grey 2D, M Control Monitors Sensors Enhance Zone M Mode Splicer Top Plane PreAmp TGC Board Commutator Scan Bus HV M Peak Output Sum Control Interface Pwr Sup Scan Bus Hold RFAmp Control Interface PCI Bus 40P0 TD 40P1 Scan Bus Control TxSync Bus BPCLK System TxSync Front End TD Control Clock Generator/ RxSync Power Supply Distributor Generator +3.3 V +5 V Scan Bus +5 V analog VAC PCI Bus -5 V analog Scan +12 V Sequencer +120 V I,Q Capture PS ON PCI-PCI Processed Capture Bridge (B, M) Video Ring Buffer Capture Scan Control Board Internal I/O PCI Cable to BEP Figure 5-3 The Front End 5-3-1 Front End Processor Power Supply Board (FEPS, FEPS2, FEPS2.1) The power supply assembly receives approximately 220VAC from the secondary side of the mains isolation transformer. The FEPS assembly supplies DC regulated power to the Front End card rack of the LOGIQ™ 9. The assembly is configured as a PCB which fits into the right-most slot of the Front End card rack. It interfaces with the back plane to supply power to the Front End circuit boards. A general enable signal ( PS_ON ) controls enabling and disabling all FEPS Low Voltage outputs. These include +5VA, -5VA, +5V, 3V3, +12V, and +15V (all except PHVP ‘High Voltage’). An Enable circuit on the FEPS detects when PS_ON becomes valid and holds all outputs off until then. Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-5

[Page 108] 5-3-1Front End Processor Power Supply Board (FEPS, FEPS2, FEPS2.1) (cont’d) The high voltage lockout circuit monitors the +5VA, -5VA, +12VA and 3V3 supplies and locks out the PHVP supply in the event that any one of them go below 10% of their nominal value. PWR_OK is an active high TTL compatible output which provides a status indication of the AC input power. It should be capable of sinking 5mA maximum. The signal switches to a TTL ‘High’ when the AC input voltage reaches the minimum specified input level at power up. Upon loss of input voltage, PWR_OK will go ‘Low’. 5-3-1-1 FEPS3 The FEPS3 Board was introduced with R3.0.0 Software and BT’03. It is not backward compatible with prior hardware as it provides the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) required by the TD5s and RFAMP2. Table 5-2 FEPS, Output Comparison FEPS, FEPS2, FEPS2.1 FEPS3 System Name Nominal Output Nominal Output 5VPA +5.05V +6.0V 5VNA -5.05V -6.0V 5VP +5.05V +5.05V 3V3 3.33V 3.33V PHVP +121.2V / +24.2 +121.2V / +24.24V 12VP 12.12 13.0V 15VP +15.15 +15.15 5-3-2 Front End Subsystem The LOGIQ™ 9 Front End Subsystem consists the XDIF (Transducer Interface) board, RF Amp board and eight TD (Transmit Delay) boards. Figure 5-4 Basic Front End SubSystem The Front End Subsystem provides 128 receive and 128 transmit channels as well as gain and bandpass filtering of the received signal. 5-6 Section 5-3 - Front End Processor

[Page 109] 5-3-2-1 XDIF (Transducer Interface) Board Figure 5-5 XDIF Board Functions The XDIF supports four 128 Channel probe ports with the ability to select one of the four probe ports. The XDIF supports a probe multiplexer requiring a 200V (+100V and -100V). The multiplexer in the probe will select 128 of the out of up to 192 channels. The XDIF uses a T/R (Transmit/Receive) switch on each output to the RF Amplifier board. During transmit the T/R switch prevents the high voltage transmit pulser from damaging the receive preamplifier. During receive the T/R switch isolates the receive preamp from the transmit high voltage pulser. 5-3-2-2 Top Plane Connects the receive signals from the XDIF board to the RF Amplifier board at the front of the circuit boards. Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-7

[Page 110] 5-3-2-3 RF Amp, RF Amp1.2, RF Amp2 Board (Radio Frequency Amplifier Board Figure 5-6 RF Amp, RF Amp2 Functions Figure 5-7 RF Amp Board Functional Block Diagram The RF Amplifier board shall contain 128 channels of the circuitry that is necessary to amplify the small electronic echo signals that are received from the probe transducers. Each channel shall consist of a low-noise, active input termination preamplifier, a time-gain compensation (TGC) amplifier, and a low noise differential drive amplifier (buffer). The RF Amp board shall physically reside in the Beamformer card cage adjacent to the XDIFF board. The probe level analog input signals shall enter the RF Amp board on a series of board to board connectors that mate the RF Amplifier Board to the XDIFF Board. These connectors carry the transducer level receive signals that originate at the probe and make their way through the probe interface relays, and T/R switches. The digital interface, power supplies, and reference ground shall be provided to the RF Amp board by the system backplane. Each amplified signal generated by the RF Amp board shall provide a differential output and drive filter circuitry located on the TD boards via the system backplane. The TD boards perform an anti-alias filtering operation and convert the transducer signals to a 12 bit data stream that feeds the digital beamforming electronics. RF Amp2 Board The RF Amp2 Board was introduced with R3.0.0 Software and BT’03. It is not backward compatible with prior hardware as it requires the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) provided by the FEPS3 Board. 5-8 Section 5-3 - Front End Processor

[Page 111] 5-3-2-4 TD, TD4, TD5 (Time Delay) Boards (8) Figure 5-8 Basic TD Board Functions Major functions of the TD boards are: - Transmitter - Analog Receive - A/D (Analog to Digital conversion) - Digital Receiver (Rigel Beamformer Chip) - Control & Timing Figure 5-9 Basic TD Input/Output Signals The TD (Time Delay) boards send 128 transmit signals to the XDIF board. The 128 receive channels from the RF board get low pas filtered, converted from analog to digital and then use the Rigel beamformer chip to generate complex digital data signals representing one or two beams of ultrasound echo information sent to the EQ board. Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-9

[Page 112] 5-3-2-4TD, TD4, TD5 (Time Delay) Boards (8) (cont’d) Figure 5-10 Basic TD Input/Output Control Signals Major control siganal from the EQ board are the Digital TGC/VREF and Serial Control Bus (I C). Control signal between the Scan Control board consist of Power, Timing Clocks, TD Control Bus and Fault Interrupts Time Delay (TD, TD4, TD5) Board Function Summary: • Each board assigned to a subset of 16 channels. • Generates and amplifies the excitation waveform for each channel. • Digitizes the input RF signal from the RF Amplifier board. • Applies dynamic apodization, dynamic receive delays, and filters to the digitized RF signal. • Automatically adapts receive beams for speed or resolution depending on scans. • Sums detected echo channel to channel, then board to board. (Boards must be contiguous.) The last TD forwards the total output to the EQ. • Monitors current consumed for transmit and issues a fault signal if overcurrent is detected. TD5 (Time Delay 5) The TD5 Board was introduced with R3.0.0 Software and BT’03. It is not backward compatible with prior hardware as it requires the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) provided by the FEPS3 Board. 5-10 Section 5-3 - Front End Processor

[Page 113] 5-3-3 Scan Control Board (SCB, SCB2) The Scan Control Board combines onto one board the basic functionality of Image Port (IP), Front End Control and Timing (FECT), Scan Sequencer (SS2) and the Scan Trigger (System Timing). SCAN SEQUENCER BLOCK EQ_BE_RxSync PA_SCB_ACFAIL(1:0) QRS* VP_DAT(7:0) IMAGE PORT 2 BLOCK LOC_CLK Scan Sequencer Scan Bus and VP_ADR(4:0) I/F To MEQ, BMP Peripherals SYS_SCAN_BUS(13:0) IP_CLK PCI Slave DSP PCI & CTRL and VP_STB Decode To MEQ & BMP SCAN I/F LE GLOB_SEC_PCI(61:0) Cable From PC (From IP2 Block) PRIM_PCI(52:0) LOC_SCAN_BUS(17:0) SCAN TIGGERS(2:0) PCI Interface IP_CLK SYSTEM TIMING BLOCK System Clocks LOC_CLK IP_CLK MFG Test Clocks IP SCB_EQ_RxSync CONTROL System Clock Timing Generation Image Control PCI 33MHz Memory IP_CLK LOC_SLV_PCI_BUS(60:0) VID_CLK IP CTRL VIDEO_DAT(4:0) IP_CLK FE_SYTM_BUS(59:0) FECB_CLK(10:0) From BMP Video Local PCI Bus BM_SCB_DAT(9:0) and FECT BLOCK Pipelink From MEQ Input LOC_SCAN_BUS(13:0) To TD Boards IQ_SCB_DAT(31:0) FEC_TD_BUS(80:0) EQ_BE_RxSync Front End Control Board Block FEC INT: TD_HVFAULT* IP_CLK HVINT* I2CINT* PRBINT* CWINT* Figure 5-11 SCB Simplified Block Diagram Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-11

[Page 114] 5-3-3-1 SCB, SCB2 High Level Features • Generates and buffers system clocks: - 40 MHz (40P0 and 40P1) - 10 Mhz (BPCLK) - TXSync - RxSync • Configures the beamformer to fire B/M-Mode, Color, or PW Doppler vectors. • Controls scan sequencing in real-time; setting the vector firing order and timing intervals. • PCI interface to Back End Processor (BEP), BMP, and EQ or EBM/EBM2. • Buffers B/M data from BMP/EBM/EBM2, data from the EQ/EBM/EBM2 (for Color and PW Doppler), and video data from the VCR to transmit to the BEP for software processing and display. • Interface between Host PCI and TD boards. 5-3-3-2 Compatibility Only SCB2 Boards should be used with R3.0.0 software and greater 5-3-3-3 Scan Control Board LEDs Table 5-3 SCB LED Indications Function LED Monitored Number LED Color LED Function I960 Processor DS1 Red i960 Fail DS2 Yellow i960 Local Bus Activity Image Port DS3 Red Toggles during Image Port Frames DS4 Green Toggles during Image Port Frames DS5 Yellow IP Master Enable DS6 Yellow IP Master Ready Pipelink DS7 Red IQ Left FIFO Error DS8 Red IQ Right FIFO Error DS9 Red BM FIFO Error DS10 FIFO’s Empty Scan Sequence DS11 Red Crash DS12 Yellow FIFO Error DS13 Yellow Command Pulse DS14 Yellow Unused DS15 Yellow Pause DS16 Green Unused DS17 Green Happy Light - Toggles during Scan Sequence DS18 Green Happy Light - Toggles during Scan Sequence 5-12 Section 5-3 - Front End Processor

[Page 115] Table 5-4 SCB2 2365739 LED Indications LED Number LED Color LED Function DS1 Green FPGA Programming Done (Passed) DS2 Red i960 Fail DS5 Green Toggles during Image Port Frames DS6 Red Toggles during Image Port Frames DS7 Red Crash DS8 Yellow FIFO Error DS9 Yellow Command Pause DS10 Yellow Unused DS11 Yellow Pause DS12 Green Unused DS13 Green Happy Light (toggles during Scan Sequence) DS14 Green Happy Light (toggles during Scan Sequence) Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-13

[Page 116] 5-3-4 Equalization (EQ) Board 5-3-4-1 General Description The EQ dynamically gains and filters the received signal output from the final beamformer sum. TGC control calculates range dependent analog and digital gains. The digital gain is applied to the I/Q signal. The gained signal is then rotated in frequency to place the frequency of interest in the passband of the subsequent FIR lowpass filter. The rotator center frequency may also be range dependent. These controls, and the selection of the FIR coefficients may also be processing bank, vector number, or transmit focal zone dependent. EQ Board Block Diagram Scan SCAN Local Control Control Board Bus I/F Control Temperature Local XDIF XDIF/Probe Bus Monitoring Board and To: XDIF & Relay Circuits Control Probe I/F IIC Voltage A/D Monitoring Local Commutat Converters Circuits Board or Comm Control Bus To: XDIF Control Control I/F IIC SPROM CLK-10MHZ Local Analog Base Analog TGC Bus Board Delay TGC TGC To: TDs Control MUX Local Digital V-Ref Board TGC Gen Control Dynamic Apodization Gain Gain Coef Mod’s Mod’s RAM Delay LUT 5 5 16 Td: I-dat I (L,R) BARREL I (L,R) I (L,R) I (L,R) I (L,R) I (L,R) I (L,R) SHIFTER FIR BARREL 21 5 17 16 16 16 16 16 NCO SHIFT MULTIPLIER NCOM FPGA Data Pipe Bus AND To: BMP/SCB Td: Q-dat Q (L,R) Q (L,R) Q (L,R) Q (L,R) Q (L,R) Q (L,R) OUTPUT Q (L,R) FIR FPGA 21 17 16 16 16 16 16 Coef RAM CLK-10MHZ Figure 5-12 EQ Board Block Diagram 5-14 Section 5-3 - Front End Processor

[Page 117] 5-3-4-2 Basic Functions • Compensates for the attenuation of the transmitted signal in tissue by depth: performs TGC based on focal zone. • Compensates for frequency shift (TFC) in tissue, needed in B-Mode and M-Mode. • Filters out harmonics and optimizes signal to noise ratio. • Delivers amplified and corrected I & Q data to the BMP and the Scan Control Board. • Interfaces probe detection and probe ID signals between the XDIF and the host. • Controls transducer commutator (multiplexer) for muxed probes with more elements than channels in the beamformer. • Monitors active probe temperature. • Masters the front end (FE) I2C busses for voltage and temperature monitoring. • Turns off PHVP on the cardrack power supply if a TD board pulls too much power or malfunctions. Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-15

[Page 118] 5-3-5 B/M Mode Processor (BMP) Board 5-3-5-1 General Description The B/M-mode Processor (BMP) subsystem takes the digital complex data from the EQ subsystem and converts it to either B-mode (2D) or M-mode (timeline) data. Figure 5-13 BMP Internal Functions • Processes I & Q data for B-Mode and M-Mode imaging. • Calculates echo signal’s amplitude. • Converts sample rate to display rate. • Implements dynamic range and edge enhancement. • Splices multiple focal zones into one image. • Sends processed B/M data to the Scan Control Board. Figure 5-14 BMP Control Inputs/Outputs 5-3-6 EBM, EBM2 Board The EBM Board was used on forward production units starting with BT’02 (November 2002). The EBM2 Board was used on forward production units starting with R3.0.0 Software (BT’03 October 2003). The detailed functionality is found in the previous EQ and BMP sections. 5-16 Section 5-3 - Front End Processor

[Page 119] 5-3-6-1 Overview The EBM/EBM2 board is the data path interface board between the last Time Delay board (TD) and the Scan Control Board (SCB). The EBM/EBM2 receives data from the Time Delay boards, processes the data for depth attenuation effects, and passes the data on to the BM processor, then to the Scan Control Board. This board is composed of two main sections the Equalization (EQ) and the B/M Mode Processor (BMP). The EQ section compensates for the attenuation of ultrasound in tissue. The attenuation of ultrasound in tissue is usually modeled as being linearly dependent on frequency and depth. The EQ section provides two major data processing functions to compensate for this phenomenon, Time Gain Control (TGC), and Time Frequency Control (TFC). Using TGC and TFC, the EQ ”equalizes” image signals by removing depth dependent attenuation effects from the signal, hence the name ”equalization” board. In layman terms, the EQ gives a point deeper in the body an equal opportunity to contribute to the ultrasound image as one closer to the body’s surface. The BMP section process IQ Vectors from the EQ to create B and M mode vectors. This design is composed of 12 major blocks; Synthetic Aperture, Axial Interpolator, Detector/Vector Compounder, Smoothing Filter, Rate Converter, Dynamic Range Compression, Edge enhance, Splicer, B–Mode Output, M–Mode Output, Vector Configuration and the PCI Interface. 5-3-6-2 Modes of Operation The EBM/EBM2 equalization design section supports two input data buses from the final summer of the TD board set. The two buses are referred to as the I and Q data buses (or pipes). Each two’s complement bus is 24 bits wide and passes data from the final TD board to the EBM/EBM2 board. Different system modes of operation cause the two data pipes to handle data in different ways. The EBM/EBM2 board transfers output data to the Scan Control Board over two, two’s complement sixteen bit I and Q buses. Internal EBM/EBM2 board data pipes are sixteen bit two’s complement format. Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-17

[Page 120] 5-3-6EBM, EBM2 Board (cont’d) HV Line HV Line Power Supply Control Power Supply Control I2C BUS I2C BUS Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply PCI BUS PCI BUS HV Control HV Control HV Control XDIF Probe Interface Bus XDIF Probe Interface Bus SCAN CONTROL BUS SCAN CONTROL BUS XDIF Interface Bus XDIF Interface Bus Fan Control / Fan Control / Fan Control / SCAN SCAN SCAN PCI PCI PCI I2C I2C I2C XDIF/ XDIF/ XDIF/ PS PS PS Commutator Commutator Commutator Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl I/F I/F I/F I/F I/F I/F Probe Probe Probe Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Measurement Measurement Measurement I/F I/F I/F I/F I/F I/F I/F I/F I/F I/F I/F I/F Probe Probe Probe Temperature Temperature Temperature Base Base Base Analog Analog Analog Sensor Sensor Sensor TGC TGC TGC Analog Analog Analog TGC / Vref Bus TGC / Vref Bus Delay Delay Delay MUX MUX MUX TGC TGC TGC V-ref V-ref V-ref High Speed High Speed High Speed Digital Digital Digital SSRAM SSRAM SSRAM TGC TGC TGC GEN GEN GEN ~ 9Mbit ~ 9Mbit ~ 9Mbit Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Apodization Apodization Apodization Configuration Configuration Configuration Gain Mod’s Gain Mod’s Coef Coef Coef Flash Flash Flash 5 5 RAM RAM RAM RXSYNC Delayed RXSYNC Delayed (Host Programmed) (Host Programmed) (Host Programmed) TFC TFC 5 5 Barrel Barrel Barrel LUT LUT 5 5 Delay Delay Delay 16 16 NCO NCO NCO 32-tap 32-tap 32-tap I(L,R) I(L,R) I(L,R) Shift & Shift & Shift & I(L,R) I(L,R) FIR FIR FIR 16 16 16 16 16 TD: I-Data TD: I-Data I(L,R) I(L,R) I(L,R) I(L,R) I(L,R) I(L,R) I(L,R) I(L,R) I(L,R) Complex Complex Complex I(L,R) I(L,R) Output Output Output 24 24 Barrel Barrel Barrel 17 17 17 17 16 16 16 Mult Mult Mult 16 16 Block Block Block TD: Q-Data TD: Q-Data Q(L,R) Q(L,R) Shifter Shifter Shifter Q(L,R) Q(L,R) Q(L,R) Q(L,R) Multiplier Multiplier Multiplier Q(L,R) Q(L,R) Q(L,R) Q(L,R) Q(L,R) Q(L,R) 32-tap 32-tap 32-tap Q(L,R) Q(L,R) Q(L,R) Q(L,R) Q(L,R) RXSYNC RXSYNC 24 24 17 17 17 17 16 16 16 16 16 16 FIR FIR FIR 16 16 16 16 16 TXSYNC TXSYNC Coef Coef Coef RAM RAM RAM CLK-20MHz CLK-20MHz CLK-10MHz CLK-10MHz CLK-40MHz CLK-40MHz FIFO FIFO FIFO 8Kx18 8Kx18 8Kx18 FIFO FIFO FIFO IQ (Q) Data IQ (Q) Data 16 16 8Kx18 8Kx18 8Kx18 CLK-20MHz CLK-20MHz RXSYNC Delayed RXSYNC Delayed FIFO FIFO FIFO 8Kx18 8Kx18 8Kx18 Test Test Test 16 16 16 16 Synthetic Synthetic Synthetic 16 16 16 16 Axial Axial Axial 16 16 16 16 Detector & Detector & Detector & Low Low Low Rate Rate Rate Vector Vector Vector Aperture Aperture Aperture Interpolation Interpolation Interpolation Vector Vector Vector 15 15 15 Pass Pass Pass 15 15 15 Converter Converter Converter 15 15 15 Generator Generator Generator 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 Compound Compound Compound Filter Filter Filter TXSYNC TXSYNC Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Edge Edge Edge B-Mode B-Mode B-Mode B/M Mode B/M Mode B/M Mode Range Range Range 8 8 8 Enhance Enhance Enhance 8 8 8 Splicer Splicer Splicer 8 8 8 Output Output Output 8 8 8 Output Output Output (I) Data (I) Data SRAM SRAM SRAM Compress Compress Compress Test Vector Test Vector Test Vector 10 MSB 10 MSB 16 16 64Kx16 64Kx16 64Kx16 8 8 8 M-Mode M-Mode M-Mode 8 8 8 Local SCAN Bus Local SCAN Bus Output Output Output Capture Capture Capture Vector Vector Vector PCI PCI PCI Configuration Configuration Configuration I/F I/F I/F Figure 5-15 EBM/EBM2 Board Block Diagram 5-3-6-3 EBM/EBM2 Interface with XDIF relay board The EBM/EBM2 EQ section supports an eight-bit read/write data interface to the XDIF relay board. The interface is used to transfer commutator control information to the selected probe and provides host access to the XDIF relay board itself. The EBM/EBM2 board monitors four probes present and four probe hook lines from the XDIF relay board. The EBM/EBM2 EQ section monitors the lines, and generates an interrupt signal when any of the signals change state. The interrupt signal will be debounced to limit the frequency with which probe interrupts may be generated. The EBM/EBM2 board also measures the temperature of the selected probe over two lines from the XDIF relay board. The SCE pulse signal connected to the EBM/EBM2 EQ section in order to be able to support the Global Beamforming future development. 5-18 Section 5-3 - Front End Processor

[Page 121] 5-3-6EBM, EBM2 Board (cont’d) 5-3-6-4 B–Mode Output Blocks The B–mode output block collect vector data and tags for delivery to the Scan Control Board. It can form output vectors from one or multiple input vectors (multi–transmit focus). The vector tags are used to form the control bytes in the output vector. Only complete vectors are sent to the BM_OUTPUT Block. The maximum vector length shall be 512 pixels. 5-3-6-5 M–Mode Output Block M–mode acquisition is nearly always a multiple firings per output vector operation. When the vector rate is higher than the display rate a peak accumulate function shall be used to provide an output which is the point–by–point peak signal amplitude of all the firings since the last output. The M–mode output block usually outputs one processed M vector after combining the receive vectors from several firings. The maximum ratio of input vectors to output vectors is 256, although this number is transparent to the hardware. M_GATE tag shall control when the current peak accumulation stops, the vector is sent and a new vector is formed. The peak accumulation shall be reset after the data is sent to the BM_OUTPUT Block. Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-19

[Page 122] Section 5-4 Back End Processor (BEP) The Back End Processor (BEP) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in memory, performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor. Back End Processor software is also providing Color Flow, Doppler, and M-Mode Processing. PC MOTHERBOARD SLOT 7 Front Panel HD LED ETHERNET PCI Slot #5 SLOT 6 RS232 #3 RS232 #4 PC2IP I2C RS422 INTERNAL DRIVE BAY PC2IP HARD DRIVE PCI Slot #4 SLOT 5 IDE #1 Optional 3D TOP DRIVE BAY system ECG PCI BIRD CARD PCI Slot #3 SLOT 4 DIGITAL OUT MIDDLE DRIVE BAY SPEAKER OUT MIC IN MOD LINE OUT LINE IN SOUND CARD PCI Slot #2 SLOT 3 BOTTOM DRIVE BAY CD RW PCI VIDEO PCI Slot #1 IDE #2 SLOT 2 UPS Battery AGP VIDEO AGP Slot SLOT 1 JWR1 CPU #1 10/100bT PARALLEL USB1 JFP1 USB2 UPS JWOL1 DIMM Slot #4 DIMM Slot #3 DIMM Slot #2 DIMM Slot #1 CPU #2 256 MB DIMM 256 MB DIMM COM1 COM2 (EXT) AC POWER ATX POWER SUPPLY PCIO MODULE POWER S/C VIDEO OUT SVGA OUT 2 PCIO Board Control SVGA IN SVGA OUT 1 RGB OUT PCVIC Board Figure 5-16 CPU/Back End Processor BEP1 NOTE: Specifications mentioned about the Back End Processor (BEP) will be minimum requirements. The actual hardware could exceed these specifications as technology advances. 5-20 Section 5-4 - Back End Processor (BEP)

[Page 123] 5-4-1 Enclosure The EMC enclosure shall house an ATX Power Supply with UPS battery backup, an ATX style motherboard with minimum of 512 MB of ram and two 733MHz processors 5-4-2 PCI Cards 5 PCI slots on the mother board shall contain the following: 1.) PCI Video Card - Digital Video to the Touch Panel 2.) Sound Card - Sound Blaster Live for audio to speakers 3.) Blank or PCI Bird 3D Card - Option 4.) PC2IP Card - GE designed. PCI Bus interface to the Front End Processor 5.) Network Interface Card - 3Com Ethernet Card 5-4-3 AGP Video Card - SVGA Video to the PCVIC Card • Analog output shall comply with the SVGA specification. • Resolution shall be 800x600. • Support for 32 bit True Color • Minimum of 8 Mbytes of high speed Video RAM, expandable to at least 16 Mbytes. • 128-bit internal memory interface. • Hardware supported asynchronous bit block transfer (80 Mpixels/sec). • Full Direct 3D and Open-GI support (desirable). 5-4-4 PCIO Board: This GE designed board does not plug into any slot but is mounted to the inside of the PC chassis. - Power and Internal PCI control signals 5-4-5 PCVIC Card - Input from AGP Video card (BEP1.0) or Motherboard AGP Video (BEP 2.0) This GE designed board does not plug into any slot but is mounted to the inside of the PC chassis. - SVGA output to the image monitor - RGB output to color printer 5-4-6 DGVIC, DGIO and ADD Cards BEP 2.1 (BT’02, November 2002) The ADD Card is a PCI card that mimics the AGP video and provides a digital video output to the DGVIC board. The DGVIC converts the digital video to RGBS, SVGA (to Monitor and External I/O), S-video and Composite video outputs. The DGIO provides signals and power to I/O boards. Signals like PS_ON, I C, RS232, PC Power and PC On/Off. Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-21

[Page 124] 5-4-7 Additional Memory (RAM)(BT’03, October 2003) - BEP2.2 Additional memory was added to the motherboard for R3.0.0 Software and BT’03. one of the 256 MByte SIMM modules was replaced with a 512 MByte module. This brings the total RAM memory to 768 MBytes and designated the unit to be a BEP2.2. 5-4-8 DGVIC/DGIO Upgrade It is possible that older P3 Back End Processor video chains could be upgraded to digital. This involves replacing the Analog AGP Video card with a Matrox video card that has analog and video outputs. The PC2IO/PCVIC Tray assembly is also replaced with the DGIO/DGVIC Tray. Digital video is supplied by the Matrox video card to the DGVIC for distribution to peripherals. Monitor video is taken directly from the Analog output of the Matrox video card instead of the DGVIC. 5-4-9 UPS Battery Operation The UPS batteries provide power to the Back End Processor to enable a controlled shut down of the processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the off condition. The off condition is defined as: - Circuit Breaker in the OFF position - System unplugged from the wall outlet If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system may not boot up or may beep when turned ON. Should this occur, the system needs to recharge the UPS batteries. This could take 15 minutes to as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system input voltage and system temperature. To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the circuit breaker in the ON position. The expected life of the battery is approximately three (3) years. 5-22 Section 5-4 - Back End Processor (BEP)

[Page 125] 5-4-10 Internal Storage Devices: • A 20 or 40 Gigabyte EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet. • 3.5 inch Magneto-Optical Drive (MOD) (available from front of scanner). • CD-RW Drive (available from front of scanner). 5-4-11 Location of the Back End Processor P3 Backend Processor P4 Backend Processors typically have a fan in the center of the cover Left Sideof Front of Scanner Scanner Figure 5-17 Backend Processor mounted in scanner 5-4-12 Inputs 5-4-12-1 AC Power Table 5-5 AC Power Input Description Connection from: AC Distribution Box > Backend 230 VAC AC Power Processor 5-4-12-2 DC Voltages Table 5-6 DC Input Voltages Input Description Connected to: +5Vstb Standby voltage DC Power Supply via Backplane DC Power Supply via Backplane and II/ GND Electrical Ground Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-23

[Page 126] 5-4-12Inputs (cont’d) 5-4-12-3 Input Signals Table 5-7 Input Signals Signal Name Description Signal Path PWR_OK* Power verification signal from Card Rack Card Rack > IIO > PC2IO Signal from the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel and Top Console > IIO > PC2IO ON/OFF Switch from the Reset button on the rear of the External I/O. ON/OFF Reset (EIO) > IIO > PC2IO I2C Register Interrupt signal from I2C Bus EIO > IIO > PC2IO Interrupt Microphone in to Microphone signal from Monitor (Top Console) Top Console > IIO > BEP BEP Replay Audio from VCR > IIO > BEP Audio in to BEP Audio from VCR or Doppler Audio Doppler Audio Out from Card Rack > IIO > BEP 5-4-12-4 Bi-directional Signals Table 5-8 Bi-directional Signals Signal Name Description Signal Path UPS Control Control Signals to and from the UPS BEP > IIO RS232 RS232 XDCTRL Not Used PC2IO > IIO > Not Used Data bus used for Remote Control of External Units and for I2C Bus PC2IO > IIO > EIO reading module versions. Spare RS232 Not Used PC2IO > IIO > Not Used VCR Remote Ctrl Control signal to Internal VCR PC2IO > IIO > VCR (RS232) USB #1 USB bus to Top Console PC2IO > IIO > Top Console COM 1 Can be configured to transfer report page data PC2IO > IIO > EIO PC2IO > IIO > EIO (Rear of Module) > COM 2 Modem Modem Ethernet Standard TCP/IP Ethernet BEP > IIO > EIO > External Network USB #2 USB Bus for External Units BEP > IIO > EIO > External USB Unit NOTE: BEP2.x processors have one Com Port and six USB Ports. The Com Port is connected to the modem via the Internal I/O. A USB to Serial Converter feeds the external serial connection via the Internal I/O. BEP 2.1 Processors have digital video coming from a Matrox or ADD card going to the DGIO/DGVIC Tray. BEP 2.x processors have Ethernet and Analog Video on the motherboard. 5-24 Section 5-4 - Back End Processor (BEP)

[Page 127] 5-4-13 Outputs Table 5-9 Output Signals Signal Name Description Signal Path +5VDC DC Voltage PC2IO > IIO +12VDC DC Voltage PC2IO > IIO PS_ON* TBD (Active Low) PC2IO > IIO > Card Rack Standby TBD PC2IO > IIO > Top Console SVideo SVideo Out PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO CVideo Composite Color Video PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO VGA VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO VGA High Resolution Video to Internal Video Screen (Top VGA BEP > Top Console Console) BW Video from RGB. PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO BW Video RGB This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9 This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9 BEP > IIO > Internal VCR Audio Out Audio Out from BEP BEP > IIO > EIO > External VCR TRIG Video Trig Signal PC2IO > IIO > EIO Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-25

[Page 128] 5-4-14 BEP Power On Path (refer to Figure 5-18 on page 5-26 ) The Back End Processor is powered ON by: - Press and release the OP I/O Standby (On/Off) switch. - The signal from the OP I/O goes to the II/O (A4) and through the rack power relay in the Internal I/O. - The PC Power ON signal from the II/O (B6) goes to the PC2IO (D2) then to the BEP motherboard commanding the BEP Power Supply to turn ON. Figure 5-18 BEP Power On Path 5-26 Section 5-4 - Back End Processor (BEP)

[Page 129] 5-4-15 BEP Power Off Path (refer to Figure 5-19 on page 5-27 ) The Back End Processor is powered Off by: - Press and release the OP I/O Standby (On/Off) switch. - The signal from the OP I/O goes to the II/O (A4) and through the rack power relay in the Internal I/O to the I C register. - Software detects the request to power down via the I C buss from the II/O (B5) to the BEP (D1). - The system begins a controlled shut down procedure closing applications, files, turning off FE rack power and finally BEP power. Figure 5-19 BEP Power Off Path Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-27

[Page 130] Section 5-5 Operator Console Control PWA Figure 5-21 and Figure 5-20 show the audio path through the Operator Console Control Printed Wire Assembly. +12VDC +VUSB +VAUDIO C27 C26 C40 C11 C17 C10 + C35 .01uF 47UF .01uF 47UF .01uF 47UF 47UF J5 Stby LED 1 FB15 N/C 2 FB16 Power SW 3 N/C 4 FB13 +12VDC 5 GND 6 +12VDC 7 FB12 GND 8 +12VDC 9 GND 10 FB6 +15VDC 11 GND 12 +15VDC 13 GND 14 FB7 N/C 15 N/C 16 FB8 MIC 17 FB9 Mic Out + MIC RTN 18 Mic Out - MIC Shield 19 Audio Shield 20 FB10 Audio Left + 21 FB3 Left Audio In + Audio Left - 22 FB11 Left Audio In - Audio Right + 23 FB4 Right Audio In + Audio Right - 24 Right Audio In - N/C 25 N/C 26 FB17 Vusb 27 USB GND 28 Vusb 29 FB14 USB GND 30 USB D+ 31 USB D+ USB D- 32 USB D- USB Shield 33 N/C 34 Host 9103-40020-034 Figure 5-20 USB-OP Console Control PWA - Power TP3 Left Audio In + Left Audio In + 1 Left Audio In - VCC +Vaudio C2 0.1UF R2 22.1K C9 C16 + C5 + U2 0.1UF SCLK_INT 1 3 47UF GND 47UF MOSI 2 U/D INC VH VW 5 AC_CS_Left 7 CS VL 6 X9314 (10K) 3 10 U1 TDA1552Q GND_PA Left TP1 Vp1 Vp2 4 Audio Output1A 1 C1 1 IN1 TP5 .22 Output1B 6 J3 Right Audio In + 1 11 Mute/Stby 1 2 + - Left Speaker Right Audio In - VCC Right TP2 Output2A 9 3 4 + - Right Speaker Audio 1 C3 13 IN2 AMP 640456-4 GND_SIGNAL C6 .22 Signal Output2B 7 0.1UF R3 22.1K Gnd GND1 GND2 U3 TP4 2 5 8 1 INC VH 3 GND 2 U/D VW 5 1 (signal) AC_CS_Right 7 CS VL 6 X9314 (10K) +Vaudio GND_PA GND_PA GND_PA GND_PA XU1 3 5 XU101 IS 1/2 OF 7 TDA15520 WHEN IT IS 9 MOUNTED ON THE 11 BOTTOM AND ROTATED 13 180. 1/2-TDA15520 Figure 5-21 USB-OP Console Control PWA - Audio 5-28 Section 5-5 - Operator Console Control PWA

[Page 131] 5-5-1 Console Main Cable 5-5-1-1 Main Cable Connector Functions A M Figure 5-22 Main Cable Drawing Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-29

[Page 132] Table 5-10 Main Cable Composition Item Function Lower to Description A Safety Ground Connector A - G Safety Ground Connector B DVI to DVI Interface B - I Interface to the Touch Screen B- I C RGB to the Main Monitor C - H RGB to the Main Monitor C - H D 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J E USB Audio, Microphone E - K USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel F DC Power and Control F - K DC Power and Control to the Operator panel G Safety Ground Connector A - G Safety Ground Connector H RGB to the Main Monitor C- H RGB to the Main Monitor C - H I DVI to DVI Interface B - I Interface to the Touch Screen B - I J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J K USB Audio, Microphone and DC E/F - K USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel L Microphone to the Operator panel E - L to the Operator panel Microphone M “Z” Release Cable From piston to “Z” relaese handle on the console 5-5-1-2 Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts Table 5-11 Connector A & G- Safety Ground Pin Signal 1 Ground Table 5-12 Connector B & I - Touch Screen Interface 1 LVDS Data 2- 10 LVDS Data 1+ 19 Ground 2 LVDS Data 2+ 11 Ground 20 3 Ground 12 21 4 13 22 Ground 5 14 +5V 23 LVDS Clock - 6 +5V 15 Return 24 LVDS Clock + 7 Return 16 +12V Backlight 8 17 LVDS Data 2- 9 LVDS Data 1- 18 LVDS Data 2- 5-30 Section 5-5 - Operator Console Control PWA

[Page 133] Table 5-13 Connector C & H - Touch Screen Interface 1 Red 6 Red Ground 11 nc 2 Green 7 Green Ground 12 nc 3 Blue 8 Blue Ground 13 H Sync 4 nc 9 nc 14 V Sync 5 nc 10 Sync Ground 15 nc Table 5-14 Connector D & J - 110VAC to Monitor 1 110 VAC 2 Ground 3 Neutral Table 5-15 Connector E - USB, Audio & Microphone 1 nc 6 USB 5V 11 Ground Audio - Right 2 nc 7 USB 5V 12 Ground Microphone 3 Audio - Left 8 USB D+ 13 Ground USB 4 Audio - Right 9 nc 14 Ground USB 5 Microphone 10 Ground Audio - Left 15 USB D- Table 5-16 Connector F - Op Console Power 1 +15 6 +12V 11 Standby LED 0 2 +15 7 +12V 12 nc 3 nc 8 +12v 13 +12 Ground 4 On/Off SW0 9 +15 Ground 14 Ground USB 5 On/Off SW1 10 +15 Ground 15 USB D- Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-31

[Page 134] Table 5-17 Connector K- Op Console Power, Audio, Mic, Control 1 Standby LED 0 13 +15V 25 nc 2 nc 14 + 15V Ground 26 nc 3 On/Off SW1 15 nc 27 USB 5V 4 On/Off SW0 16 nc 28 USB Ground 5 +12V 17 MIcrophone 29 USB 5V 6 +12V Ground 18 Microphone Ground 30 USB Ground 7 +12V 19 Shield Power/Control 31 USB D+ 8 +12V Ground 20 Shield Audio/Mic 32 USB D- 9 +12V 21 Audio - Left 33 Shield USB 10 +12V Ground 22 Audio - Left Ground 34 nc 11 +15V 23 Audio - Right 12 + 15V Ground 24 Audio - Right Ground Table 5-18 Connector L- Console Microphone Pin Signal 1 Microphone Microphone Ground 5-32 Section 5-5 - Operator Console Control PWA

[Page 135] Section 5-6 Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ™ 9) The Patient I/O is mounted inside the Backend Processor’s cabinet with its connector panel available on the front of the scanner. The Patient IO contains the electronics for ECG, phono and two analog inputs. One of the inputs has programmable gain. The module extracts respiration from ECG. The electronics also contains a pacemaker detector. The four inputs are separately isolated because of safety requirements. ISOLATION PHONO PHONO ECG A/D Digital Trace Data ECG / RESPIRATION to PC2IO AUX 1 AUX1 AUX2 AUX 2 (Pulse/Pressure) (Pulse/Pressure) Figure 5-23 Patient I/O - Block Diagram Inputs • Phono (from a phono heart microphone) • ECG / Respiration • AUX1 • AUX2 (Pulse/Pressure) These signals are optically isolated from the rest of the system. Outputs Serial Trace Data via Internal I/O to the SPD Board. Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-33

[Page 136] Section 5-7 Internal I/O The Internal I/O is the interface between the Card Cage, PC Module, and the rest of the system, including the Top Console and the Peripherals. Table 9-15 on page 26 and Table 9-17 on page 33 have information on cable call-outs. BACK-END PROCESSING MODULE SVGA SVGA BD. SVGA SVGA TOP CONSOLE MONITOR PCVIC 3D & FRONT-END TV - RGBS PERIPHERALS AC POWER ROTATION PROCESSING (VCR & printers) & FANS ADAPTER MODULE Power Power TV video, SGVA & I2C USB, audio, ctrl. signals Power Power Ctrl. signals Ctrl. signals Ctrl. signals TV video, audio, audio & TV video PC2IP & ctrl. signals RS232, I2C RS232, ctrl. signals TV video, SVGA, RS232 & I2C INTERNAL I/O Power Power UPS PC2IO RS232 Power SVGA, TV video & ctrl signals RS232, USB, I2C, Ethernet, Serial data, I2C Ethernet, USB, COM1/2 & audio PAT I/O EXTERNAL I/O Power Figure 5-24 Internal I/O Basic Interconnect 5-34 Section 5-7 - Internal I/O

[Page 137] Section 5-7 Internal I/O (cont’d) TO CARD RACK SONY VCR SVO-9500MD Remote Right AUDIO OUT Left SONY B/W PRINTER UP890MD Right AUDIO IN A8 Left B/W Video In A9 RS-232C A6 A7 RS-232C SONY VIDEO OUT COLOR PRINTER A2 UP-2900MD A15 Video Output A11 VIDEO IN COLOR PRNT RGB & Sync A10 VIDEO A1 Speaker OP PANEL Video/Mic Audio Amp A3 Mic Pre-Amp A14 AC Power Op Control MONITOR A4 To AC CONTROL ASSY for FAN SPEED USB, +12PC, MIC IN, AUDIO OUT Video Rcvr Regulation COLOR PRNT A5 TOUCH PANEL VIDEO USER INTERFACE VIDEO D5 RGB Out PC/VIC B5 D4 SVGA Out D3 SVGA from AGP PC2IO SVGA VIDEO 50M B6 D1 I/O-PC2IO Signals Cable D2 Power from PC B7 B8 COM2 (EXT) COM1 B2 B1 USB #2 TO INTERNAL I/O USB #1 BOARD B3 PC 10/100 T B9 UPS CNTRL MOTHERBOARD Line In B4 Line Out Mic In SOUND CARD SVGA VIDEO AGP VIDEO INTERNAL I/O BOARD TOUCH PANEL PCI VIDEO VIDEO CD/RW FLOCK OF BIRDS (option) PCI Bus to FEP MOD Cardrack PC2IP Ethernet ECG PC MODULE Figure 5-25 Internal I/O Module Overview Internal I/O Enchnacement for BT’03 (FC200423) Modifications were made to the Internal I/O in October of 2003 to enhance the performance of the Microphone function. Resistor values were changed in the microphone amplifier circuit to increase the gain, a capacitor was added to reduce noise as well as a mofidified wiring scheme and differential pre- amp to reduce noise. This new FRU is backwards compatible. Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-35

[Page 138] Section 5-7 Internal I/O (cont’d) Figure 5-26 Internal I/O Back End Processor Connections The Internal I/O board performs buffering and distribution of video and control data from various sources to multiple destinations. • SVGA (R, G, B and Sync.) are fed from the BEP, directly up to the system monitor. Another set of RGB can be fed to a color printer. • Composite video, black and white video and S-Video are buffered and distributed to VCR and printers. • The analog Doppler signals are fed from the Spectrum Doppler board to the VCR audio inputs and through a switch where audio from VCR playback also is input, to the BEP and then to the speakers. • Serial RS-232 interface signals from the BEP are fed to the destinations; VCR, Color Printer and Modem. • Serial USB interface signals from the BEP are fed to the Front Panel and to EIO. • Remote control signals for printers are generated on the I/O board. • The Footswitch is connected to the I/O board. • An AC Power Interface controls power on/off and fan speed. 5-36 Section 5-7 - Internal I/O

[Page 139] 5-7-1 Location in the Unit The Internal I/O Module is plugged into the Card Rack (at the end nearest to the rear of the system). Internal I/O (behind all the cables) Back of System Backend Processor Figure 5-27 Internal I/O: Location in the System (Seen from Left Side) 5-7-2 LEDs Nine green LEDs indicate that the respective DC Voltages are OK. Figure 5-28 Internal I/O: Green LEDs for Power Status. 5-7-3 Fuses All output voltages are fused 5-7-4 Jumpers and Dip-switches TBD Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-37

[Page 140] 5-7-5 Inputs DC Voltages Table 5-19 DC Input Voltages +3.3 VDC Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 +5 VDC Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 +10 VDC Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 +15 VDC Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 -15 VDC Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 +6 VDC (analog) Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 –5 VDC (analog) Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 +5 VDC Input DC Voltage Backend Processor > J17 +12 VDC Input DC Voltage Backend Processor > J17) Video Input Signals Table 5-20 Video Input Signals SVGA Video Signal to External I/O PC2IO (Connector J16) SVHS Video Signal to VCR & External I/O PC2IO(Connector J16) SVHS Video Signal to MBD (IMP) VCR (Connector J11) Luma Video Signal to B&W Printer and External I/O PC2IO (Connector J16) Comp. Video Video Signal to External I/O PC2IO (Connector J16) Comp. Video Video Signal to MBD (IMP) Color printer Audio Input Signals Table 5-21 Audio Input Signals Two channel audio MBD (IMP) Two channel audio VCR Audio signals, summed and distributed Two channel audio BEP 5-38 Section 5-7 - Internal I/O

[Page 141] 5-7-5Inputs (cont’d) Serial Ports Table 5-22 Serial Ports USB Standard USB Serial Bus BEPM - Top console USB Standard USB Serial Bus BEPM - IEIO Ethernet Standard Ethernet BEPM - IEIO RS232 Standard RS232 Serial Bus BEPM COM1 - IEIO RS232 Standard RS232 Serial Bus BEPM COM2 - IEIO RS232 Standard RS232 Serial Bus PC2IO - Spare (J16) RS232 Standard RS232 Serial Bus PC2IO - VCR (J16) RS232 PC2IO - Color printer (Connector J16) RS232 PC2IO – UPS (Connector J16) Control Signals Table 5-23 Control Signals Control signals Spare MBD/FEC (Connector J16) Control signals Spare MBD/FEC (Connector J16) Trace trigger To EIO PC2IO (Connector J16) Fan control signals To AC Power MBD (Connector J16) Power control To MBD and AC Power PC2IO (Connector J16) signals Top Console ON/OFF Switch and EIO Power on/off To Relay Test (Connector J16) Standby To Top Console PC2IO (Connector J16) Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-39

[Page 142] 5-7-6 Outputs DC Voltage Table 5-24 DC Output Voltages Output Description Connection to +5 VDC From BEP +12 VDC +5 VDC, -15 VDC, From Card Rack Spare (Connector J21) -5 VDC analog +5 VDC From BEP +12 VDC +5 VDC, -15 VDC, From Card Rack Not Used -5 VDC analog +5 VDC, From Card Rack Not Used +15 VDC, +12 VDC From BEP Top Console +15 VDC From Card Rack +5 VDC From BEP +12 VDC +5 VDC, EIO +15 VDC, From Card Rack -5 VDC analog +6 VDC analog AUDIO Table 5-25 Audio Outputs Output Description Connection to Top Console speakers and BEP Audio (two Audio (Doppler sound) from MBD (IMP), VCR, BEP VCR and IEIO channels) 5-40 Section 5-7 - Internal I/O

[Page 143] 5-7-6Outputs (cont’d) Interface Connectors – Component Side Table 5-26 Connectors, Component Side A1/J1 B&W printer, 15pins HD-sub, female. A2/P4 VCR remote ctrl – RS232: 9pins D-sub, male. A3/P5 Color printer - RS232: 9pins D-sub, male. A4/J2 Top Console - Power & signals: 15pins D-sub, female. A5/P4 Top Console - Signals: 15pins D-sub, male. A6/J6 Audio out to VCR, left: Phono jack. A7/J7 Audio out to VCR, right: Phono jack. A8/J8 Audio in from VCR, left: Phono jack. A9/J9 Audio in from VCR, right A10/J10 SVHS out to VCR A11/J11 SVHS in from VCR B1/J12 USB to Top console B2/J13 USB to external I/O B3/J14 Ethernet B4/J15 Audio I/O B5/J16 PC2IO signals B6/J17 PC2IO power B7/P18 COM1 B8/P19 COM2 B9/P25 UPS remote control J32 MBD – signals and power Table 5-27 Connectors, Solder side A12/J21 Spare power, 15pins D-sub, female A13/J20 Spare – power, 15pins D-sub, female A14/J24 AC power ctrl, 9pins D-sub, female Rotation adapter – signals, 15pins D- A15/P23 sub, male A16/P22 Spare – signals, 25pins D-sub, female P30 EIO – signals and power, 110pins male Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-41

[Page 144] Section 5-8 Top Console The Top Console includes a Stand By/On switch, a keyboard, different controls for manipulating the picture quality, and controls for use in Measure & Analyze (M&A). Figure 5-29 Top Console BT’03 Consoles added a USB connector to the Upper Op Panel for the Wired Voice Scan Option. Figure 5-30 BT’03 Top Console 5-42 Section 5-8 - Top Console

[Page 145] Section 5-9 Monitor 17-inch High Resolution Monitor with no interlace scan includes loudspeakers for stereo sound output (used during Doppler scanning). Figure 5-31 Monitor Section 5-10 External I/O The External I/O is the interface between the scanner and all external items. External I/O Figure 5-32 5-10-1 Location in the Unit On the rear of the scanner, above the power inlet and power breaker. Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-43

[Page 146] 5-10-2 Input Signals Table 5-28 Input Signals Input Description Connection from/via/to Footswitch is a mechanical switch that connect a signal to Footswitch Footswitch > External I/O > Internal I/O ground. Connector > PC2IO (BEP) Internal level is TTL (0-3.3V) DC Voltages from BEP +5 VDC PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/ Used for Optical Couplers on RS232 signals +12 VDC DC Voltages from Card Rack +5 VDC +15 VDC -5 VDC analog Used for Optical Couplers on Footswitch Card Rack > Internal I/O > External I/O +6 VDC analog 5-10-3 Bi-directional Signals Table 5-29 Bi-directional Signals Signal Name Description Signal Path Ethernet - External I/O - Internal I/O - Ethernet Standard 10/100 Base TX Ethernet BEP (Ethernet Connector) Serial RS-232 port (Can be configured to transfer report External Device - External I/O - Internal COM1 page data to an external processor) I/O - BEP (COM1) USB Device - External I/O - Internal I/O USB Standard USB (Universal Serial Bus), (0-5V) - BEP (USB #2)) Analog Phone Line - External I/O Modem Internal Modem Telephone Line Connection (Connector Panel) - External I/O (Rear Side)- Modem Serial RS-232 port Modem - External I/O COM2 (on rear side of External I/O) (Rear Side) - Internal I/O - BEP (COM1) Burn-in Power On/ Burn-in Power On/Off Control (on rear side of External I/O) External I/O (Rear Side) - Internal I/O Off Control - Used for factory testing. 5-44 Section 5-10 - External I/O

[Page 147] Connection to Internal I/O Board SVGA OUT USB EXTERNAL I/O PWB S-Video OUT C-Video OUT BW Video OUT 10/100Base-TX Burn In Power ON/OFF Control Audio (R) Audio (L) To MODEM RS232 (COM1:) External I/O Upper PWB TRIGGER FOOTSWITCH EXPOSE #1 EXPOSE #2 Modem Phone Connection MODEM EXTERNAL I/O Module Figure 5-33 External I/O Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-45

[Page 148] 5-10-4 Output Signals Table 5-30 Output Signals Signal Name Description Signal Path Audio Source (Internal VCR/ Stereo audio to external VCR. (Same signal as delivered to Stereo Audio Microphone/BEP) > Internal internal VCR). I/O > External I/O > External VCR. External composite video, 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced, PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/ Composite Video sync negative. O > External Composite Video Device Super Video Super Video PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/ Luminance: 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced. (SVHS) O > External VCR Color: 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced. Black and White External black and white video PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/ video 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced, sync negative. O > External B/W Video Device Trig Trigger Signal, 0-3.3V SVGA (RGBS) high resolution video output PCVIC > PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > SVGA (Same signal as sent to the systems monitor) External I/O > External Monitor PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/ Remote Expose #1 A SW controllable relay, to control external peripherals O > External Peripheral PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/ Remote Expose #2 A SW controllable relay, to control external peripherals O > External Peripheral Several signal are fed from the Internal I/O board to an External I/O board located on the rear of the system. This board contains data buffers and a galvanic isolation section. Different types of signals are fed to connectors accessible on the External I/O. • R, G, B and Sync are provided for external RGB monitors or printers. • Composite video, black and white video and S-VHS video are buffered and fed to output connectors for external monitors and printers. • Two serial RS-232 ports are provided for external communication with e.g. the System CPU. • An Ethernet signal from the BEP is fed to an Ethernet connector. It is used for connectivity, including DICOM Network. Section 5-11 Peripherals A VCR, an analog or digital Black-and-White Video Printer and an analog or digital Color Printer may be installed on the scanner. These devices receive video signals from the Internal I/O Board and power from the AC Control Box. Peripherals are gemerally specified and approved regionally. BT’02 (BEP 2.1 and above) systems have digital peripheral capabilities through USB or USB To SCSI converters. 5-46 Section 5-11 - Peripherals

[Page 149] Section 5-12 Modem 5-12-1 General Description Multi-Tech global modem. The modem is a standard modem that connects to an analog phone line. 5-12-2 Location in the Unit Global Modem Figure 5-34 Modem: Location in Unit 5-12-3 Inputs/Outputs • DC Voltage from Modem Power (AC/DC Converter) • RS232 from Backend Processor via Internal I/O and External I/O • Analog Phone line via External I/O 5-12-4 Fuses None 5-12-5 Jumpers and Dip-switches None 5-12-6 LEDs The Modem has 10 LEDs on its front. Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-47

[Page 150] TDRD CD 56 3314OHTRECFX Figure 5-35 LEDs on Modem’s Front Panel Table 5-31 LEDs on Modem LED Color Description Normally State - Red TD (Transmit Data) Flashes during use. - Red RD (Receive Data) Flashes during use. ON when detecting a carrier from another modem and during - Red CD (Carrier Detect) communication. OFF indicates no or broken connection. - Red 56 (56K Mode) During Power On: Briefly Flashing These LEDs indicates communication speeds above 14 kbs. If - Red 33 (V.34 Mode) one of this LEDs are ON during communication, it will stay ON until the modem is reset or connected the next time. - Red 14 (V.32bis Mode) At speeds below 14 kbs, these LEDs are OFF. ON when dialing, online, or answering a call - Red OH (Off hook) Flashes if puls dialing Off when modem not in use ON when the system initializes the modem. It indicates that the modem is ready for an outgoing or incoming call. - Red TR (Terminal Ready) OFF indicates that communication on the RS232 (COM) port has been broken. The connected (remote) modem will disconnect. ON: Error Correction (V42) is turned ON - Red EC (Error Correction (V.42)) Blinking: Compression turned ON OFF: Normal operation. - Red FX (Fax) Always OFF 5-48 Section 5-12 - Modem

[Page 151] Section 5-13 Power Distribution 5-13-1 Basic Overall AC Power Distribution AC Distrubution Box (PWB) Fan Regulator Fan 20 VAC Mains Power Breaker Filter 230 VAC 115 or 230 230 VAC VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC Inrush Select IIO Limit Voltage DC Power 115 VAC VAC DC Voltages to TX Power Cards Select AC Voltage for Transformer Peripherals on TX Voltages AC Distrubution Transformer Box Box (PWB): Front-End Proccessor 115 VAC or 230 VAC. AC/DC UPS Battery DC/AC 115 VAC Monitor DC Power distribution inside Back-End Processor Back-End Processor AC/DC Black & White Printer Modem Converter AC Distri- NOTE: Modem with AC/DC Converter and bution Box Not Used cables are optional (used for InSite). VCR Color Video Printer (Video Cassette Recorder) Figure 5-36 Overall Power Distribution Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-49

[Page 152] 5-13-2 Overview The AC Power’s main tasks are to supply the various internal subsystems with AC power and to galvanically isolate the scanner from the on site Mains Power System. To reduce inrush current, an inrush current limiter as well as an EMI filter. Voltage to peripherals can be configured to either 115 VAC or 230 VAC. The AC Power also controls and supplies the 20VAC needed by the systems cooling fan. 5-13-3 AC Power PWB AC DISTRIBUTION PWB TO OUTLET TRANSFORMER BOX AC INLET BOX INRUSH LIMIT 230Vac Cable #27 115Vac L Mains 230Vac switch 20Vac 230 115 TO PERIPHERIALS (115 or 230 Vac) TO MONITOR (115 Vac) Cable #13 TO MODEM (230 Vac) Fan TO PC (230 Vac) regulator TO CARD RACK (230 Vac) CABLES INTERNAL IN AC CONTROL MODULE #27 TO A14 ON INTERNAL I/O POWER SUPPLY ON, Cable #7 M FAN SPEED CONTROL Figure 5-37 AC Power Distribution The mains cord has plugs in both ends. A female plug connects to the scanner and a male plug to the mains outlet on site. The mains voltage is routed via an EMI filter to the Mains Switch, located on the rear of the system. The Mains Switch is of the auto fuse type, if for some reason the current grows to high, the switch will automatically break the power. From the Mains Switch, the AC power is routed via an Inrush Current Limiter (titled: Inrush Limiter in Figure 5-37) to a internal outlet connector for the Mains Transformer. 5-50 Section 5-13 - Power Distribution

[Page 153] 5-13-3AC Power PWB (cont’d) The Transformer is the galvanic barrier between the rest of the scanner and the on site AC Mains. Input voltage to the transformer can be either 230VAC or 115 VAC (two different part numbers/FRUs). The configuration of the plug on the cable to the AC Transformer is different for the two AC Voltages. From the AC Transformer, there are three outlets; • 20 VAC • 115 VAC • 230 VAC The 20 VAC is routed via the fan regulator to the system fan. (See separate description, Chapter 5 - Air Flow Control ). The 115 VAC is routed via a fuse to an AC Voltage selector, used for selecting the right output voltage for the Peripherals outlet and the Monitor. (The alternative voltage to this outlet is 230 VAC.) The 230 VAC output from the Transformer is routed via a fuse and distributed to the AC Voltage selector for the Peripherals outlet and to the following AC outlets: • Modem • Back End Processor • Card Rack Figure 5-38 Conntectors on Back of AC Controller Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-51

[Page 154] 5-13-4 AC Controller Differences Figure 5-39 Original AC Controller Functions 5-52 Section 5-13 - Power Distribution

[Page 155] AC Controller FC200403/FC200404 Figure 5-40 Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-53

[Page 156] Section 5-14 Mechanical Descriptions 5-14-1 Monitor • Tilt: 10° forwards and backwards • Swivel: 90° rotation. 5-14-2 Top Console Positioning Figure 5-41 Top Console Positioning • Vertical Access: The control panel offers 27 inches (200 mm) of vertical adjustment. • Horizontal Access: The control panel offers 45° of horizontal adjustment when the Z-arm is released. 5-54 Section 5-14 - Mechanical Descriptions

[Page 157] Section 5-15 Air Flow Control 5-15-1 Air Flow Distribution The fan at the rear of the scanner draws air into the scanner, through the foam filter, and pushes it through a flange that moves the air into a cavity on top of the card rack. Air holes in the bottom of this cavity allow the air to move down through the card rack. Air exits the card rack through holes on its internal side panel into the interior of the scanner near the rear of the Backend Processor. The internal fan in the Backend processor draws the air into the PC allowing it to pass through the interior of the PC, and exit the lower front area of the scanner. Section 5-16 Service Platform 5-16-1 Introduction The Service Platform contains a set of software modules that are common to all ultrasound and cardiology systems containing a PC backend. This web-enabled technology provides linkage to e- Services, e-Commerce, and the iCenter, making GE’s scanners more e-enabled than ever. The Service Platform will increase service productivity and reduce training and service costs. Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-55

[Page 158] 5-16-2 Global Service User Interface (GSUI) 5-16-2-1 Internationalization The user interface provided by the service platform is designed for GE personnel and as such is in English only. There is no multi-lingual capability built into the Service Interface. 5-16-2-2 Service Login Select the wrench icon in the status bar at the bottom of the scan display screen. This icon links the userto the service login screen. Figure 5-42 Login Screen for Global Service User Interface 5-16-2-3 Access / Security The service interface has different access and security user levels. Each user is only granted access to the tools that are authorized for their use. Table 5-32 Service Login User Levels User Level Access Authorization Password Operator uls Authorized acccess to specified diagnostics, error logs and utilities. Same Administrator uls acquisition diagnostic tests as GE Service. External Service gogems Every access request, whether successful or not, will be logged into a service access log that is viewable to authorized users. 5-56 Section 5-16 - Service Platform

[Page 159] 5-16-3 Service Home Page The navigation bar at the top of the screen allows the user to select from several tools and utilities. Figure 5-43 Customer Service Home Page Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-57

[Page 160] 5-16-4 Error Logs Tab From the Error Logs Tab the Log Viewer displays four categories with pull-down sub-menus and an Exit selection. The Service Interface allows scanner logs to be viewed by all service users. The Filter Error log is not available to customer level analysis. The log entries are color-coded to identify the error level severity at a glance. Table 5-33 Log Entry Key Severity Error Level Color Code 1 Information Green 2 Warning Blue 3 Error Red The Service Interface supports the transfer of these logs to local destinations such as the MOD, and CD-ROM drive. Figure 5-44 Log Viewer / Logs / Log Entries 5-58 Section 5-16 - Service Platform

[Page 161] 5-16-4-1 Logs The seven sub-menus of the Logs category are System, Power, Infomatics, Temperature, Probe, Board, and DICOM. NOTE: Figure 5-44 provides a graphical example of the log entries for the System Logs . Log table headings for the differrent logs are as follows: • System Log entry headings include Time Stamp; Error Level; Package; and Error Message. • Power Log entry headings include Time Stamp; Error Level; Package; and Error Message. • Infomatics Log entry headings include TimeStamp, Revision, PtID, PtDOB, PtSex, PtWeight, PtHeight, ExamID, Exam Category, ExamCurDate, and ExamStartTime. • Temperature Log entry headings include Time Stamp; Error Level; Package; Upper FEC Sensor; and Lower FEC Sensor. • Probe Log entry headings include Time Stamp; Error Level; Package; Error Message; Severity; Revision; and three (3) new labels that have not yet been named. • Board Log entry headings include Time Stamp; Error Level; Package; Board; Severity; and two (2) new labels that have yet been named. • DICOM Log entry headings include Time Stamp; Error Level; Package; and Error Message. Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-59

[Page 162] 5-16-4-2 Utilities The two sub-menus of the Utilities category are Plot Log, and Plot Page. Plot Log Plot Page Figure 5-45 Utilities Sub-Menus • Plot Log Allows for the color coded plot of all Log contents with the package on the ‘x’ axis and incident count on the ‘y’ axis. • Plot Page Allows for the color coded plot of all Page contents with the package on the ‘x’ axis and incident count on the ‘y’ axis. 5-16-4-3 Search On the Text Search sub-menu of the Search category, users enter case-sensitive text they wish to find. This filter field works well for filtering the Sys log file for the word “fail”. Figure 5-46 Search Sub-Menu 5-60 Section 5-16 - Service Platform

[Page 163] 5-16-4-4 Exit The sub-menu, Exit Log Viewer , returns the user to the Service Desktop home page. Figure 5-47 Exit Log Sub-Menu Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-61

[Page 164] 5-16-5 Diagnostics Detailed Diagnostic information is found in Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting . Figure 5-48 User Diagnostic Page 5-16-5-1 Diagnostics Execution Diagnostic tests are executable by both local and remote users. The Service Platform provides top-level diagnostic selection based on the user’s level and login access permissions. Remote access will require disruptive diagnostic permissions to run Acquisition diagnostics. 5-16-5-2 Diagnostic Reports Diagnostic tests return a report to the Service Platform. The platform retains the report and allows for future viewing of the diagnostic logs. 5-62 Section 5-16 - Service Platform

[Page 165] 5-16-6 Image Quality The Image Quality page is intended to contain tools for troubleshooting image quality issues. FIELD IS NOT YET POPULATED Figure 5-49 Image Quality Page 5-16-7 Calibration The Calibration page is intended to contain the tools used to calibrate the system. FIELD IS NOT YET POPULATED Figure 5-50 Calibration Page Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-63

[Page 166] 5-16-8 Configuration The Configuration page is intended to be used to setup various configuration files on the system. The Service Platform is the access and authorization control for remote access to the configuration subsystem. The enable/disable of software options can be done from this Configuration page. Figure 5-51 Configuration Page 5-16-9 Utilities The Utilities page contains several miscellaneous tools. Figure 5-52 Customer Utilities Page 5-16-10 Replacement The Replacement page is intended to contain the tools used to track replacement parts used in the system. 5-64 Section 5-16 - Service Platform

[Page 167] FIELD IS NOT YET POPULATED Figure 5-53 Part Replacement Page 5-16-11 PM The PM page is intended to contain the tools used in periodic maintenance of the system. FIELD IS NOT YET POPULATED Figure 5-54 Planned Maintenance Page Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-65

[Page 168] This page was intentionally left blank. 5-66 Section 5-16 - Service Platform

[Page 169] Chapter 6 Service Adjustments Section 6-1 Overview 6-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 6 This chapter describes how to test and adjust the mechanical capabilities of a scanner that may be out of specification. Although some tests may be optional they should only be performed by qualified personnel. Table 6-1 Chapter 6 Contents Section Description Page Number 6-1 Overview 6-1 6-2 Regulatory 6-1 6-3 Monitor 6-2 6-4 Touch Panel Calibration 6-5 6-5 Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment 6-6 6-6 Brake Arm Adjustment 6-11 6-7 Brake Adjustment 6-13 Section 6-2 Regulatory Verify, where applicable, that any regulatory information or tests required by national law are present and accounted for, and any regulatory tests required by national law are performed and documented. Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-1

[Page 170] Section 6-3 Monitor 6-3-1 Monitor Adjustment Contrast, brightness and degauss are adjusted using the three (3) keys located on the front of the monitor just below the screen. DECREASE MENU INCREASE Figure 6-1 Monitor Adjustment Switches By pressing either the increase button or decrease button the degauss menu appears. Pressing the menu button will degauss the monitor. If you do not wish to degauss the monitor, again press either the decrease button or increase button and the monitor will return to the default screen. To calibrate brightness and contrast, go to Utility>Test Patterns>Calibration. The screen display will change as shown in Figure 6-2 on page 6-3 . 6-2 Section 6-3 - Monitor

[Page 171] Section 6-3 Monitor (cont’d) Figure 6-2 Monitor Brightness/Contrast Calibration Test Pattern Follow the instructions on the screen. Press the menu button (middle) to adjust the Contrast to 50. Press the menu button again and adjust the Brightness to 100. Decrease the Brightness setting untill the inner gray is the same shade as the black box that surrounds it. This brightness setting should range between 35 to 55. Final adjustment relies on customer approval. Cameras and printers may need to be adjusted to match any monitor changes. Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-3

[Page 172] 6-3-2 Monitor Tilt The monitor is capable of a full 10° forward and backward tilt. Although the default setting of the tilt tension on the monitor should be adequate to tilt the monitor for your viewing preference, it can be easily adjusted. The monitor chassis is attached to the monitor mount plate that has a shaft that inserts into the top plate of the scanner. This feature allows the monitor to swivel without need for adjustment. The monitor mount plate has two points for adjustment. 6-3-2-1 Monitor Tilt Adjustment Procedure Passing through the monitor mount plate on its underside is a large bolt, with a locking nut on its left side, that provides the tension for monitor tilt. Adjust the tilt tension by loosening or tightening the locking nut on this bolt. NOTE: The right side of this bolt will receive an Allen wrench to provide resistance when loosening and tightening the locking nut. 6-3-2-2 Monitor Counter-balance Adjustment Procedure At the back of the monitor mount plate is a nut securing a bolt passing through the shaft. This bolt has a tapered end and several spring washers that when seated into the cylinder provides a proper counter- balance for the monitor. Monitor Mount Plate Tilt Adjustment Bolt Counter-balance Adjustment Bolt Figure 6-3 Monitor Tilt Tension Adjustment 6-3-2-3 Tools Phillips screwdriver Open-ended wrenches 6-3-2-4 Manpower 1 person, 1 hour + travel or 2 people, 1 hour + travel if the monitor needs to be removed. 6-4 Section 6-3 - Monitor

[Page 173] 6-3-2-5 Procedure 1.) Raise the Control Panel to a height that allows you to work underneath the monitor. 2.) Remove the eight (8) Phillips screws holding the Under Shelf Cover to the Shelf Cover Assembly. 3.) Remove four (4) Phillips screws holding the monitor Rear Cover Assembly to the monitor chassis. 4.) You now have access the monitor tilt and counter-balance adjustments. Adjust accordingly. 5.) Install the monitor rear cover assembly to the monitor chassis. 6.) Position the shelf cover assembly and secure it in place with the Under Shelf Cover and the eight Phillips screws. Section 6-4 Touch Panel Calibration The Touch Panel Adjustment/Calibration procedure can be found in Section 7-5-1-1 “Calibration Utilities” on page 7-13 . Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-5

[Page 174] Section 6-5 Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment The operator panel can move up and down (Z direction). A gas spring in the scanner provides a counter force to "balance" the weight of the operator panel and allows for positioning with minimal effort. A lever on the main handle has a cable (similar to a bicycle cable) that provides the release for the gas spring. This cable has one end attached to the release lever and the other end attached to the mechanism on the gas spring piston. 6-5-1 Time Required Approximately 1 person for 1 hour plus travel. 6-5-2 Tools Phillips screwdriver 10mm open-end wrench Two (2) small slotted screwdrivers Needle-nose pliers Small ruler Large slotted screwdriver 3mm Allen wrench 6-5-3 Preparations DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. COMPLETELY POWER OFF AND SHUTDOWN THE SCANNER BEFORE SERVICING. 1.) Power Off / Shutdown the scanner. 6-6 Section 6-5 - Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment

[Page 175] 6-5-4 Z-Release Cable Adjustment CAUTION Before making any adjustments, check the Z-release system to determine what adjustments need to be made. 6-5-4-1 Checking the Release System 1.) Squeeze the Z-release lever and move the operator panel to its highest position. If this is not possible, perform the necessary steps in Emergency Release Procedure on page 6-10. 2.) Place a small ruler next to the Z-release lever as shown in the Figure 6-4 below. 3.) Gently wiggle the Z-release lever and measure the amount of play in the lever. 4.) If this amount is 3mm or more, there is too much play in the cable. Perform the steps in the section Z-Release Cable Adjustment on page 6-7 to reduce the amount of play in the cable. 5.) Attempt to lower the operator panel by pushing down on it. The operator panel should not move. While continuing to push down, slowly squeeze the Z-release lever. 6.) Note the position of the Z-release lever when the operator panel starts to move. It should be 1/4 to 2/3 of the lever’s range of motion. If the operator panel moves without squeezing the Z-release lever, or if you have to almost fully squeeze the lever before motion is allowed, perform the steps in section Gas Spring Adjustment. Z-Release Lever Figure 6-4 Z-Release Measurement Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-7

[Page 176] 6-5-4-2 Cable Adjustment 1.) From underneath the handle use a 10mm open-end (small “ignition” style) wrench to screw in the cable adjustment screw to tighten the Z-release cable. 2.) If you cannot remove enough of the play in the cable using this adjustment, see Cable Adjustment at Gas Spring on page 6-8 Underside of Z-Release Lever Underside of Screw Head Z-Release Cable Halfway Between Casting Cable Adjustment Screw and Un-squeezed Lever Figure 6-5 Z-Release Cable Adjustment Screw 6-5-5 Cable Adjustment at Gas Spring 6-5-5-1 Preparations 1.) If not already performed, Power Off / Shutdown the scanner 2.) Remove the right- and left-side covers of the scanner. 3.) Remove the front cover of the scanner. 4.) Remove the black-and-white printer. 5.) Remove the VCR. NOTE: The height of the printer and VCR make them difficult to remove without first removing the front cover. 6-8 Section 6-5 - Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment

[Page 177] 6-5-5-2 Procedure NOTE: The operator panel must be at or near its highest position. 1.) From underneath the handle use a 10mm open-end (small “ignition” style) wrench to screw out the cable adjustment screw so the underside of the screw head is about half way between the casting and the unsqueezed lever. See Figure 6-5 on page 6-8 . 2.) There is a Wire Clamp nestled in the Forked Retainer. Refer to Figure 6-6. Using 2 slotted screwdrivers (one on each side of the clamp) loosen the clamp. Cable End Wire Clamp Forked Retainer Figure 6-6 Gas Spring Mechanism 3.) Using needle nose pliers, hold the cable end which is above the clamp and pull upward to take up any cable slack. 4.) Using one of the two slotted screwdrivers, push the Clamp down along the cable so that it is nestled back in the Forked Retainer. WARNING WARNING Do NOT attempt to pinch together or pry apart the forked retainer. If one of the tines should break off, the gas spring piston may have to be replaced at the factory. 5.) Tighten the clamp with one screwdriver to hold the cable. Let go of the pliers and then use the two screwdrivers to fully tighten the clamp. 6.) Without squeezing the release lever, check that the forked retainer is in its fully up position. 7.) Squeeze the release lever and watch the forked retainer move down immediately as the lever is squeezed, there should be very little play in the cable. Small amounts of play can be taken up (or slackened) with the cable adjustment screw per step 1. Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-9

[Page 178] 6-5-6 Emergency Release Procedure When the operator panel is at or near its highest position it is possible to see the gas spring mechanism with the Black and White Printer or the VCR removed. If the operator panel is stuck in the down position, it is not possible to see the gas spring mechanism as it is down behind the card rack. To avoid removing the Card Rack to make adjustments, try this procedure to raise the operator panel. 1.) Using 3mm Allen Wrench, remove the shoulder bolt holding the release lever on the handle. 2.) Tilt the release lever down and pull on the cable as shown in the figure below. This will give unlimited travel and hopefully release the gas spring. Push up on the operator panel while you are pulling on the cable. CAUTION Do NOT use excessive force! Figure 6-7 Release Lever 3.) If you have no cable to pull (cable broken) or you are unable to release the gas spring in this manner, you must remove the Card Rack to gain access to the gas spring mechanism. 6-5-7 Procedure Completion 1.) Install the VCR. 2.) Install the Black-and-White printer. 3.) Replace the front cover. 4.) Replace the side covers. 5.) If required, Power On / Bootup the scanner 6-10 Section 6-5 - Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment

[Page 179] Section 6-6 Brake Arm Adjustment Adjustments to the brake arm may be necessary if the pedals do not depress readily nor engage so the front wheels lock in place and do not swivel. 6-6-1 Tools Flat-head screwdriver 6-6-2 Manpower 6-6-3 Preparations 1.) Remove the front bumper. TOP VIEW Front Brake Arm Adjustment Nuts Swivel Lock Pedal / Brake Pedal Release Brake Pedal / Swivel Lock Release Brake Arm Adjustment Rod Rear Brake Arm Adjustment Nut UNDERSIDE VIEW Figure 6-8 Brake Adjustment Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-11

[Page 180] 6-6-4 Brake Arm Adjustment Procedure To adjust the brake arm it is recommended to separate both front adjustment nuts from the brake assembly. Adjustment Nuts Retaining Nuts Brake Clamp Screwdriver Brake Assembly Figure 6-9 Front Adjustment Hardware 2.) Remove the brake clamps that are inserted through a small hole in the front adjustment nuts and slipped over the nut at its collar. 3.) Loosen the front retaining nuts to allow room for adjustments. 4.) With a screwdriver you can pry the front adjustment nuts away from their connectors in the brake assembly. 5.) Set the main brake - the brake assembly should be pulled to the left. 6.) Seat the right adjustment rod into the right adjustment nut under the right front wheel as far as it will go. 7.) Seat the right front adjustment nut onto the adjustment rod as far as it will go. 8.) In order to insure that the same length of adjustment rod is seated into the two adjustment nuts you will turn the adjustment rod one turn out of the rear adjustment nut under the front wheel and turn the front adjustment nut off the adjustment rod a similar turn. 9.) Repeat this alternating rotation until the front adjustment nut lines up easily with the connector in the brake assembly. 10.)Push the adjustment nut onto the brake assembly connector and secure the retaining nut tight against the adjustment nut. NOTE: Repeat the same procedure to adjust the swivel lock. The only difference would be to set the swivel lock prior to the adjusments. 6-6-5 Procedure Completion 1.) Install the front bumper. 6-12 Section 6-6 - Brake Arm Adjustment

[Page 181] Section 6-7 Brake Adjustment 6-7-1 Front Wheel Brakes Service adjustment to the front brakes involve setting the brake so it will properly “bite” the rear tire. The default setting should provide proper braking. If not, follow the procedures below. 6-7-1-1 Tools Allen Wrenches 6-7-1-2 Manpower 6-7-1-3 Preparations 1.) Set the rear brakes to prevent the scanner from rolling. 2.) Remove the front bumper. 6-7-1-4 Front Brake Adjustment Procedure Allen Wrench to Adjust Brake Adjustment Hole Wheel Brake Figure 6-10 Front Brake Adjustment 1.) Refer to Figure 6-10. Use the Allen wrench to add more pressure in order to get more braking action. 2.) If the brakes are too tight, loosen the adjustment with the Allen wrench. 3.) Check the brakes and readjust as necessary before replacing the front bumper. Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-13

[Page 182] 6-7-2 Rear Wheel Brakes Adjustment Service adjustment to the rear brakes involves setting the brake so it will properly “bite” the rear tire. The default setting should provide proper braking. If not, follow the procedures below to remove the rear wheel and adjust the brake. WARNING WARNING Prior to elevating scanner, verify that the floating keyboard is locked in its lowest position. Verify that the front brake is locked and the scanner is unable to swivel. Verify that the rear brakes are in the locked position. WARNING WARNING Use extreme caution when elevating scanner. Elevating scanner will make it unstable which could cause the scanner to tip over. 6-7-2-1 Tools Bottle Jack Allen Wrenches 6-7-2-2 Manpower 6-7-2-3 Preparations (click here to view the cover removal video) 1.) Remove the left- and right-side covers. 2.) Remove the upper rear cover. 3.) Remove the lower rear cover. 2 screws removed Area on either side from top 2 screws removed of bottom shield used from underside to elevate scanner and Rear Brake Brake remove rear wheel. Set / Release Handle Figure 6-11 Rear Brake Adjustment 6-14 Section 6-7 - Brake Adjustment

[Page 183] 6-7-2-4 Rear Wheel Removal Procedure 4.) Elevate the scanner by placing the bottle jack on the back frame on the side of the bottom shield of the wheel you will be removing. You can also use a block of wood as a lever to raise the scanner and place a second block of wood under the chassis to support the rear wheel off of the ground. 5.) Remove the four screws and remove the wheel from the scanner. 6.) Use an allen wrench to adjust the brake so it will properly “bite” and release the rear tire. Figure 6-12 Rear Brake Adjustment 6-7-2-5 Rear Wheel Installation Procedure 1.) After adjusting the rear brake, install the rear wheel on the scanner. Hand tighten the four screws. 2.) Carefully lower the scanner and remove the bottle jack. 3.) Tighten the four screws using the weight of the scanner to provide resistance. 4.) Verify brake and scanner operation then replace all covers previously removed. Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-15

[Page 184] This page was intentionally left blank. 6-16 Section 6-7 - Brake Adjustment

[Page 185] Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting Section 7-1 Overview 7-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 7 This section describes how to setup and run the tools and software that help maintain image quality and system operation. Basic host, system, and board level diagnostics are run whenever power is applied. Some Service Tools may be run at the application level. Table 7-1 Contents in Chapter 7 Section Description Page Number 7-1 Overview 7-1 7-2 Gathering Trouble Data 7-2 7-3 Screen Captures 7-4 7-4 Diagnostics 7-8 7-5 Acquisition Diagnostics 7-9 7-6 I/O Devices 7-14 7-7 Common Diagnostics 7-16 Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-1

[Page 186] Section 7-2 Gathering Trouble Data 7-2-1 Overview There may be a time when it would be advantageous to capture trouble images and system data (logs) for acquisition through remote diagnostics (InSite) or to be sent back to the manufacturer for analysis. There are different options to acquire this data that would give different results. 7-2-2 Collect Vital System Information The following information is necessary in order to properly analyze data or images being reported as a malfunction or being returned to the manufacturer: - Product Name = LOGIQ™ 9 From the Utility>System>About screen: Applications Software - Software Version - Software Part Number System Base Image Software - Base Image Revision - Image Part Number 7-2 Section 7-2 - Gathering Trouble Data

[Page 187] 7-2-3 Collect a Trouble Image with Logs If the system should malfunction, press the Alt-D keys simultaneously. This will collect a screen capture of the image monitor, system presets and the following logs: - Keyboard Shadow Log - Error Logs - Crash Log - Power Supply - Temperature NOTE: Power Supply and Temperature logs are not currently being updated by the LOGIQ™ 9. This Alt-D function is available at all times. Figure 7-1 ALT-D Dialog Box When Alt-D is pressed, a menu box appears that allows for: - A place to enter a description of the problem - A choice to store to a pre-formatted MOD (H: drive), CD-RW or to the Export directory D: drive (for remote viewing through InSite). NOTE: You MUST select H: or CD-RW as the destination device if it is to be different than the default Export directory on the hard drive. Choose the H: drive which is the MOD or the CD-RW. The subsequent file is compressed and time stamped. The screen capture is a bitmap which eliminates the possibility of artifacts from compression. Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-3

[Page 188] Section 7-3 Screen Captures There may be times when the customer or field engineer will want to capture a presentation on the screen so it may be recovered by the OnLine Center through InSite. This is accomplished by first saving the image(s) to the clipboard using a Print Key. The P4 key is the factory default print key to accomplish a secondary screen capture. However, the default is for the video area only or the customer may have customized the P4 Key function. Therefore, screen capture should involve the following steps: 1.) Check and record any custom settings for the Print4 button. 2.) Set the Print4 button to Whole Screen, Secondary Capture. 3.) Capture the required screens to the Hard Drive, MOD or CD-R. 4.) Restore the Print4 button to it’s original settings. 7-3-1 Check and Record the P4 Key Function Check the function of the Print 4 Key in the event that the customer may have made some custom settings. 1.) Select Utilit y from the Touch Panel. 2.) Select Connectivity from the Utilities Menu. 3.) Select the Buttons tab on the Connectivity screen. 4.) In the Button field, select Print4. The Connectivity/Buttons Screen will be displayed like the one shown in Figure 7-2 on page 7-4 . Figure 7-2 Buttons Set Up Screen P4 is the factory default Screen Capture Key. If it is not set to Whole Screen or Screen Capture, as shown in Figure 7-2, proceed to step 5 to record the customer’s custom settings. 7-4 Section 7-3 - Screen Captures

[Page 189] 7-3-1Check and Record the P4 Key Function (cont’d) 5.) In the Destinations section, record the service that is displayed. The destinations list displays the following information: * Name: user defined during service configuration * Type: the type of service * Server: the device for which the service was configured * Dir: direction: output, input, or both (I+O) 6.) In the Image generated section, record the parameters related to the service. 7-3-2 Setting the P4 Key to Screen Capture If the P4 Key is not set to screen capture: 1.) While on the Connectivity screen, with the Buttons tab displayed, go to the drop down selection menu in the Destinations section. 2.) From the drop down menu select CopyToWflow_01>Image to Buffer>MyComputer>Out . 3.) Ensure that the Image generated section for capture Area is set to Whole Screen, secondary Capture and No Image Compression. 4.) The P4 Key should now be set up for whole screen capture, sending the screens to the image buffer (clipboard). Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-5

[Page 190] 7-3-3 Capturing a Screen The following is a generic process to capture any screen from the scanner: 1.) Navigate to and display the image/screen to be captured. 2.) Press P4 . This will place a snapshot of the screen on the “clipboard” displayed at the bottom of the scan image display. Clipboard Menu Thumbnails Figure 7-3 Select Image to Capture 3.) Select SCAN from the touch panel to view the image screen and the snapshots displayed on the bottom. 4.) Highlight the snapshot to be stored to the system hard drive, MOD or CD-R. 5.) Select Menu on the right side of the image screen, then highlight and select SAVE AS. Save As Figure 7-4 Menu > Save As 7-6 Section 7-3 - Screen Captures

[Page 191] 7-3-3Capturing a Screen (cont’d) Figure 7-5 Save Dialog Box 6.) A Save dialog box will be opened. Choose d:\export folder as the archive location to save the image on the hard disk, MOD or CD-R. 7-3-4 Reset the P4 Key to Customer’s Functionality If the customer had programmed the P4 Key to a function other than screen capture, restore that functionality recorded in Section 7-3-1 on page 7-4. Refer to Figure 7-2. 1.) Select Utilit y from the Touch Panel. 2.) Select Connectivity from the Utilities Menu. 3.) Select the Buttons tab on the Connectivity screen. 4.) In the Button field, select Print4. 5.) In the Destinations section, select the service(s) recorded in step 5, Section 7-3-1. The destinations list displays the following information: * Name: user defined during service configuration * Type: the type of service * Server: the device for which the service was configured * Dir: direction: output, input, or both (I+O) NOTE: Only output services can be associated to the print keys. 6.) In the Image generated section, select the parameters related to the service recorded in step 6, Section 7-3-1. Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-7

[Page 192] Section 7-4 Diagnostics As described in Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory) , the service platform uses a web- based user interface (UI) to provide access to common service components. The Diagnostic home page displays a listing of test categories consisting of Acquisition Diagnostics, I/ O Devices and Common Diagnostics. Expand the desired main category to select groups or individual tests. 7-8 Section 7-4 - Diagnostics

[Page 193] Section 7-5 Acquisition Diagnostics Acquisition Diagnostics is one of three main headings under the GSUI Diagnostics Tab. Figure 7-6 Customer Acquisition Diagnostics Individual selections run diagnostics and return status information identifying any problems. Figure 7-7 User Acquisition Diagnostics Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-9

[Page 194] When you select a test to run, the display changes as shown in Figure 7-8 on page 7-10 . 1.) Instructions Frame - Displays either a test-specific text or the default instructions. 2.) Status Frame - Initially displays the last known status for a selected diagnostic. Once the diagnostic starts, the frame displays the “current” status of all test results. - The Status Frame also contains the user interface elements used for Diagnostic Control and Operator Feedback. 3.) Execute Button - This switch has two modes - each with appropriate text: - Execute - to start the diagnostic - Abort - to stop a diagnostic 3 4 6 5 Figure 7-8 Diagnostic Selected 7-10 Section 7-5 - Acquisition Diagnostics

[Page 195] 4.) Loop Count - This is an editable text field that will only accept numeric values of 4 digits or less. When the switch is configured as an “execute” switch and pressed, the loop count field will be queried to determine the number of times to execute the diagnostic. 5.) Progress Indicator - Displays a graphical progress indicator for the user. 6.) Short Text Message - Displays brief messages about the test’s progress during execution. 7.) Status Frame Background Color - Initially gray, the Status Frame background color changes upon completion of a diagnostic to indicate completion status. - Code Status Fail = Red - Code Status Pass = Green - Code Status neither Pass nor Fail (Example: Aborted) = Gray (default color). Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-11

[Page 196] 7-5-1 Diagnostic Listings Table 7-2 Acquisition Diagnostics and Utility Listing Diagnostic/Utility Function SCB PCI Interface Diag Tests the host’s ability to communicate with the SCB via the secondary PCI bus SCB Memory Diag Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers. SCB DSP Diag Tests the Scan Sequencer’s DSP and associated components. SCB Scan Bus Diag Tests the local Scan Bus and the associated system timing. SCB Image Port Diag Tests the Image Port’s functionality. BMP PCI Interface Diag Tests the host’s ability to communicate with the BMP via the PCI bus. BMP Memory Diag Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers. BMP Signal Path Diag Tests the entire BMP signal path. Tests the host’s ability to communicate with the registers and memory on the EQ via EQ PCI Interface Diag the PCI bus. EQ Memory Diag Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers. EQ Signal Path Diag Tests the entire EQ signal path. TD Memory Diag Tests all of the on-board memory, for all installed TD boards, including registers. Tests all of the Access Modes utilized for Host/TD communication as well as Channel TD Access Diag RAM to Rigel transfers. Tests all of the XDIF functionality that is testable without a probe or probe simulator XDIF Interface Diag attached to the system, including the IIC communication. Tests the signal path of every channel from the TD Rigel Transmitter Memories to the Comprehensive Signal Path Diag SCB, via both the EQ and the BMP. TD Analog Reference Diag Tests the AD_REF and VREF voltages on the TD. Analog TGC Diag Tests the generation of the analog TGC voltage. Power Supply Diag Tests the system voltages available on the EQ. Temperature Diag Tests the temperature of the system, wherever available. Measures the noise floor of the system. The noise floor will be calculated form IQ data Noise Floor Diag received without a signal source. Loopback Diag Tests the analog front-end of the system. Acquisition Hardware Information Utility Writes a file for each Acquisition Hardware FRU containing all Vital Product Data. Transmit Utility - Start Transmit Utility - Change Channel Transmit Utility - Stop Receive Utility - Single Frame Receives signal on one channel at a time. Receive Utility - 8 Frames Visual Channel Utility High Voltage Reset Utility Tests whether all TD boards can detect a high voltage fault. Set VRF Utility Set the analog VREF to a specified value. Set TGC Utility Set the analog TGC to a specified value. 7-12 Section 7-5 - Acquisition Diagnostics

[Page 197] Table 7-2 Acquisition Diagnostics and Utility Listing (Continued) Diagnostic/Utility Function Probe Select Utility Select a probe connector to be active. Probe ID Read Utility Read the Probe ID of all installed probes. Front-End Calibration Utility Measures the Front End DC Offset, Gain, and Phase. Figure 7-9 Diagnostic Group Selections - SCB Tests 7-5-1-1 Calibration Utilities Touchscreen Calibration: Follow the directions on the Touchscreen. As each of the cross-hairs appear, touch them with your finger or a pencil eraser. You MUST hold your finger on the cross-hair until it moves to the next location. If you just tap the calibration cross-hair, there is a better than average chance your calibration will be corrupt. NOTE: Do NOT use sharp, pointed objects to press on the Touchscreen. You should also be careful if you have long,sharp finger nails. The Touchscreen can be damaged by sharp objects. After all the cross-hairs are touched the screen is calibrated. Start/Stop Touchscreen Verification: Select START TOUCHSCREEN VERIFICATION and EXECUTE. The Start Touchscreen Verification brings up a grid. Each time you touch the screen a small red dots appears. To terminate the verification, select STOP TOUCHSCREEN VERIFICATION and EXECUTE. Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-13

[Page 198] Section 7-6 I/O Devices 7-6-1 OP Panel Utilities - OP Panel Interface Front Panel key functionality can be tested using a program (ScFpApiTest) currently accessed through Service Diagnostic User InterfaceTesting the Front Panel Keys With the ScFpApiTest active, push a button on the keyboard. A readout of the button id number and the indication that it was pushed and released (1 and 0) will appear in the Log Test encoders by rotating them and getting relative values. Test slide pots (TGC) by moving them through their range. Feedback will be returned to the Log area. 7-14 Section 7-6 - I/O Devices

[Page 199] 7-6-2 Front Panel Light Tests From the ScFpApiTest screen, the front panel indicator light function can be tested. From the ScFpApiTest screen the front panel backlight function can be tested. 7-6-3 Console Troubleshooting Aids For more information on troubleshooting console problems with audio, microphone, power and control, refer to Section 5-5 "Operator Console Control PWA" on page 5-28. Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-15

[Page 200] Section 7-7 Common Diagnostics Common Diagnostics is the second main heading under the GSUI heading of Diagnostics. Figure 7-10 shows the top level menu choices under Common Diagnostics. The subheadings and their respective diagnostic/troubleshooting menu choices are called out and described in the sections below. Figure 7-10 Common Diagnostics 7-7-1 Utilities Provides two selections: 7-7-1-1 Disruptive Mode Allows you to enable or disable disruptive mode troubleshooting. 7-7-1-2 System Shutdown Allows for system shutdown from the diagnostic menu. Select to Restart System or Shutdown System. Also, select to retain Disruptive Mode or Not. After submitting to restart or shutdown a confirmation screen gives one last chance to confirm or cancel the request. 7-16 Section 7-7 - Common Diagnostics

[Page 201] 7-7-2 PC Diagnostics (Non-Interactive Tests) 7-7-2-1 CPU Tests 7-7-2-2 Hard Drive Tests 7-7-2-3 Memory Tests 7-7-2-4 CD/DVD Drive Test 7-7-2-5 Video Test 7-7-2-6 USB Test 7-7-2-7 PCI Board Configuration Test 7-7-2-8 SCSI Device Test 7-7-2-9 AGP Video Card Test 7-7-2-10 Network Test Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-17

[Page 202] 7-7-3 PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests) 7-7-3-1 Keyboard Test 7-7-3-2 Audio Test 7-7-3-3 Monitor Test 7-18 Section 7-7 - Common Diagnostics

[Page 203] This page was intentionally left blank. Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-19

[Page 204] 7-20 Section 7-7 - Common Diagnostics

[Page 205] Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures Section 8-1 Overview 8-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 8 This chapter contains replacement procedures for different modules and their subsystems. Table 8-1 Chapter 8 Contents Section Description Page Number 8-1 Overview 8-1 8-2 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure 8-3 8-3 Before Starting a Software Upgrade 8-5 8-4 Image Management Guide 8-6 8-5 Loading Base Image Software 8-12 8-6 Loading Application Software 8-18 8-7 Upgrading Application Software 8-22 8-8 System Setup 8-26 8-9 Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure 8-28 8-10 Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure 8-29 Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-1

[Page 206] 8-1-2 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances. GEMS policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to shipment. GEMS employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or an ultrasound probe). The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the people who will receive or open this package. NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items that were saturated and/or dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purposes and must be transported as a hazardous material. 8-2 Section 8-1 - Overview

[Page 207] Section 8-2 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure 8-2-1 Manpower One person, .5 hour + travel 8-2-2 Tools Phillips screwdriver 8-2-3 Preparations We anticipate,with the exception of a failure, batteries will only need to be replaced once every three years. 1.) Power Down/Shutdown the system. 2.) Remove the left- and/or right-side covers. 3.) Remove the upper rear cover. 4.) Remove the lower rear cover. 5.) Remove the Back End Processor. 8-2-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure 1.) Remove the cover of the Back End Processor. 2.) Remove the four screws from the power supply battery pack cover plate. 3.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wire. 4.) Remove the power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor. Figure 8-1 Removing / Installing the Power Supply Battery Pack Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-3

[Page 208] 8-2-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure Heat-shrink holds batteries together In Line and insulates terminals. 20A Fuse Label to be attached to this surface Battery 1 + - Spacer seperates batteries - Battery 2 + Compression tape used to minimize battery pack movement while installed in chassis Figure 8-2 Power Supply Battery Pack 1.) Slide the new power supply battery pack into its position in the Back End Processor. 2.) Attach the power supply battery pack cover plate and secure it with the four screws removed. 3.) Apply Power turn the system on. 4.) Connect the new battery pack to the power supply connector while power is applied to the Back End Processor. This will avoid a possible spark while connecting the battery. CAUTION The battery pack contains a 24V charge that will cause a spark when it is re-connected to the power supply without power applied to the Back End Processor. Be careful that this spark does not damage any equipment or cause any personal injury. To avoid the spark, connect the battery with power applied to the BackEnd Processor. 5.) Attach the cover for the Back End Processor removed. 6.) Install the Back End Processor into the scanner. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the off condition. The off condition is defined as: - Circuit Breaker in the OFF position - System unplugged from the wall outlet If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system may not boot up or may beep when turned ON. Should this occur, the system needs to recharge the UPS batteries. This could take 15 minutes to as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system input voltage and system temperature. To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the circuit breaker in the ON position. 8-4 Section 8-2 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure

[Page 209] Section 8-3 Before Starting a Software Upgrade 8-3-1 Printers In R2.1.0 software and greater, if the customer has an HP990, HP970, UP-D50, UP-D895, UP-D21 or Talley printers, any settings they have made in the device driver, such as Gray Scale Images, will be lost. These printer settings will need to be recorded. You need to go to Utilities>Periperals>Printers in order to record the printer settings. 8-3-2 Save Connectivity Settings NOTE: DICOM TCPIP settings should not be deleted with the Base Image Load due to the use of upgrade scripts. However, It may be helpful to record this settings before proceeding in case an error occurs in the loading of software. NOTE: DICOM Workflows and DICOM Device Configurations are on the “D:” drive and will be saved when User Defined Cohfigurations are saved. If you want to Import exams back on to your system after the FMI, you should record any vital DICOM data before proceeding with this FMI or upgrading software. 1.) Select Utilities>Connectivity>TCPIP tab and record all information on that tab with particular attention to: - The “Enable DHCP” box should NOT be checked - Computer Name: ______________________________ - IP-Address: ______/________/_________/_________ - Subnet Mask: ______/________/________/________ - Remote Archive IP-Address: ______/________/_________/_________ - Remote Archive Name: ______________________________________ - In the unlabeled IP Address line enter the System IP Address. This may be either the one obtained from the hospital administrator or if the system is not on a network it would be the factory default address. This address can also be found in the System>Connectivity>TCP/IP Tab. Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-5

[Page 210] Section 8-4 Image Management Guide 8-4-1 Managing Patient Data and Presets Save to MOD or CD-R any patient data, images, and system presets that have been stored or configured. Installing the base operating software may delete some patient data, images and system setups saved on the system. 8-4-1-1 Patient Images and Data Save As to View on any PC Use this to save images (Dicom or Raw Dicom) in a computer-friendly format (.avi or .jpeg) so you can view it on any PC. Move Images to Archive Use this to take images off your Ultrasound system onto removable media for long-term archive. This is the way to free up hard disk space, rather than deleting images. Export/Import Data/Images Between Systems Use this to copy both patient data and images for specified patient(s) from one system to another. 8-4-1-2 Preset Data Patient, Report, and User-Defined Backup Protocols Back up patient data AFTER you’ve archived (moved) images so that the pointers to the patient’s images reflect that the images have been moved to removable media and are no longer on the hard drive. 8-4-1-3 Backup Media CD-ROM Media Requirements Only use CD-R CD-ROMs, DO NOT use CD-RW CD-ROMs. Also, the CD-R CD-ROM MUST support 16x writing speed or greater. CD-ROM Handling Tips To eject the CD-ROM, always press F3 . DO NOT press the eject button on the CD Drive. Always finalize the CD-ROM. This allows you to read the CD-ROM on any other PC. DO NOT finalize the CD if you want to add more images to the CD. 8-6 Section 8-4 - Image Management Guide

[Page 211] 8-4-2 Export/Import (Moving Data Between Ultrasound Systems) To move exams from one Ultrasound system to another, you need to export/import exam information. NOTE: Both database information and images are exported. No data is deleted from the local archive when exporting data. 8-4-2-1 Exporting Data To export an exam(s) to a compatible Ultrasound system, 1.) Format the removable media (MOD or CD-ROM). Label the removable media. Answer Yes/ OK to the messages. 2.) Press Patient. Deselect any selected patient(s) in the search portion of the Patient screen. Press More (located at the lower, right-hand corner of the Patient menu). 3.) Select Export. Specify the type of removable media (MOD or CD-ROM) on the Export pop-up. Press OK. Then, please wait until the Patient menu is visible. Figure 8-3 Export Pop-up Message 4.) In the patient list at the bottom of the Patient menu, select the patient(s) you want to export. You can use Windows commands to select more than one patient. To select a consecutive list of patients, click the cursor on the first name, move the cursor to the last name, then press and hold down the Shift+right Set key to select all the names. To select a non-consecutive list of patients, click the cursor at the first name, move the cursor to the next name, then press and hold down the Ctrl+right Set key, move the cursor to the next name, then press and hold down the Ctrl+right Set key again, etc. You can also search for patients via the Search key and string. Or, Select All from the Select All/Copy Patient Menu: Figure 8-4 Select All/Copy Patient Menu NOTE: You need to use your best judgment when moving patients’ images. If there are lots of images or loops, then only move a few patients at a time. Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-7

[Page 212] 8-4-2 Export/Import (Moving Data Between Ultrasound Systems) (cont’d) 5.) Once you have selected all of the patients to export, press Copy Patient from the Select All/ Copy Patient Menu. 6.) Informational status messages appear as the copy is taking place. A final status report pop-up message appears. Press OK. Figure 8-5 Export Completion Status Message 1.) Press F3 to eject the media. Specify that you want to finalize the CD-ROM. However, if you want to import this data to another system, do not finalize the CD. 8-4-2-2 Importing Data To import an exam(s) to another Ultrasound system, 1.) At the other Ultrasound system, insert the MOD or CD-ROM. 2.) Press Patient, press More, then Import. The Import from pop-up message appears. Press OK. Figure 8-6 Import Pop-up Message 3.) The Patient menu just shows the patients available for import from the removable media you just loaded onto the system. 4.) Select the patients to be imported. 5.) Press Copy Patient from the Select All/Copy Patient menu. 6.) Please wait for the patient information to be copied to this Ultrasound system. Informational messages appear while the import is taking place. 7.) Press F3 to eject the media. 8-8 Section 8-4 - Image Management Guide

[Page 213] 8-4-3 Patient, Report, and User-Defined Backup Protocols Back up patient data AFTER you’ve archived (moved) images so that the pointers to the patient’s images reflect that the images have been moved to removable media and are no longer on the hard drive. 1.) Insert the backup media. Format the backup media, CD-ROM or MOD. Select the Utility tab on the Measurement Selection Menu. Select Connectivity, then Tools. Label the media. Figure 8-7 Format MOD/CD-ROM Screen 2.) The Ultrasound system displays a pop-up menu when the formatting has been completed. Press Ok to continue.Verify that the format was successful. Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-9

[Page 214] 8-4-3 Patient, Report, and User-Defined Backup Protocols (cont’d) Figure 8-8 Format Successful Pop-up Menu 3.) Select the Utility tab on the Measurement Selection Menu. Select System, then Backup/ Restore. 4.) Select everything under Backup by placing a check mark in front of Patient Archive, Report Archive, and User Defined Configuration. Then press Backup. Figure 8-9 Backup Menu NOTE: The detailed section of this menu decouples the user defined configuration above. This allows you to selectively restore what you want to restore across multiple machines. Refer to Chapter 16 for more information. 8-10 Section 8-4 - Image Management Guide

[Page 215] 8-4-3 Patient, Report, and User-Defined Backup Protocols (cont’d) 5.) Answer ‘Ok’ to the following pop-up message as many times as the number of items you are backing up. Figure 8-10 Back-up Confirmation Message NOTICE DO NOT use the following special characters when saving images: slash (/), dash (-), or asterisk (*). Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-11

[Page 216] Section 8-5 Loading Base Image Software NOTE: While it is believed to be unnecessary, It would not hurt to disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers. NOTE: If the user has an HP990, HP970, UP-D50, UP-D895, UP-D21 or Talley printers, connect the printer and turn it on. If a printer is plugged in at this time it will automatically install and you won’t have to go back to windows to install it. NOTE: If the system has any digital peripherals, be sure that they are turned on. 1.) Insert the disk labeled “Base System Software Load Image” into the CDROM drive. 2.) Properly turn off the scanner by momentarily pressing the Standby (ON/OFF) Switch. Select Shutdown from the System Exit menu. Wait for the Standby Switch to turn amber. 3.) If the system will not shutdown normally, hold down the Standby Switch until the light turns from green to amber. Figure 8-11 Shutdown Dialog Box 4.) Turn on the scanner. You will see a message displayed on the Touch Panel screen as shown in Figure 8-12 on page 8-13 . 8-12 Section 8-5 - Loading Base Image Software

[Page 217] Figure 8-12 Base Load Warning Message Now is your chance to abort the Base Image load or continue. 5.) Press any key to continue. To abort, remove the CD-ROM from the drive and press CTRL-C . Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-13

[Page 218] Figure 8-13 Base Load Option Screen The first choice is to load the complete hard drive. 1.) Load the complete disk - All existing data will be lost. NOTE: APPLICATION SOFTWARE WILL NEED TO BE INSTALLED WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS COMPLETED. ALL PATIENT DATA (IF ANY) WILL BE DESTROYED! Figure 8-14 Base Load Option 1 Message Figure 8-14 is the last warning message before the complete base load process begins. Press any key to continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C . 8-14 Section 8-5 - Loading Base Image Software

[Page 219] The second choice is to load only the bootable portion of the hard drive partition, the “C” partition. This is not an option for a new hard drive that has not been previously partitioned for proper LOGIQ 9 operation. 2.) Select [2} Load the bootable C: partition only - Patient data is NOT lost. NOTE: DO NOT USE THIS OPTION ON A BRAND NEW SYSTEM. IT IS INTENDED FOR RECOVERY OF A SYSTEM THAT WILL NOT BOOT UP. APPLICATION SOFTWARE WILL NEED TO BE INSTALLED WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS COMPLETED. ALL PATIENT DATA IS PRESERVED. This selection will leave the remaining drive partitions intact. Table 8-2 LOGIQ 9 Drive Partition and Usage Drive Partition Usage C System Files and Applications D User Define and Presets E Patient Archive Data F File Swap Area Figure 8-15 Base Load Option 2 Message Figure 8-15 is the last warning message before the base load process begins. Press any key to continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C . The third choice, 3.) Exit to the A:\ prompt. Is intended for manufacturing use only. This is NOT an option as it is intended for manufacturing use only. If you select Option 3 by mistake, power cycle the system. Hold down the Standby switch until the light turns amber then turn the system back on. Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-15

[Page 220] Once you have chosen to continue with Option 1 or Option 2, you will see a screen showing Norton Ghost. This automatically loads a base set of software onto the hard disk. Let it run to completion (Approximately 8-10 mins). A message, as shown in Figure 8-16, will be displayed when the process is complete. Figure 8-16 Base Load Complete 4.) Remove the CD-ROM NOTE: Remove the CD-ROM from the drive; otherwise you will be repeating the Base System Software Load process when the system boots up. 5.) After removing the CDROM from the drive, properly turn off the scanner by holding down the Standby Switch until the light turns amber. 6.) Turn the scanner back on. It will now boot up and automatically log on to start checking hardware and mapping disk drives. This is a normal and should be allowed to run to completion. NOTE: While the script is running, several windows or dialog boxes will appear on the screen. At times it may look like the system is unresponsive. Wait for the “System Settings Change”dialog box “Do You Want to Restart computer now” to appear, approximately 3-4 minutes after the desktop is displayed. NOTE: Prior to the System Settings Change dialog box, Do NOT touch the system during this process. Activating the keyboard, mouse or front panel could corrupt the installation. 7.) When you get a message to restart Windows, select YES. 8.) Allow the system to reboot. 9.) The system will come up into the Windows mode. 8-16 Section 8-5 - Loading Base Image Software

[Page 221] 8-5-1 System Checks 1.) From the Windows mode display, double-click ( RIGHT SET key) on the My Computer icon. 2.) Check the drive letter assignments for the Compact Disk and Removable Disk. They should be Compact Disk (G) and Removable Disk (H). 3.) If the Drive letter assignments are properly mapped, proceed to loading applications software. If the assignments are reversed, proceed to remap the drives manually. 4.) If the customer has a USB (Digital Priters) to be install, plug it in now. The system is still in Windows mode and should recognize the printer and install the necessary driver. NOTE: If the printer is installed while in application mode, excessive CPU time will be consumed and the system will become very slow to unusable. Shutting down and rebooting will clear the condition. The printer will function correctly. Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-17

[Page 222] Section 8-6 Loading Application Software 8-6-1 Loading Applications Software NOTE: If you have not done so previously, double-click on the My Computer icon. Check for the drive letters assignments of the Removable Drive (MOD) and the CD-ROM Drive. If the CD-ROM Drive is not drive “g” and the MOD drive “h” , manually remap the drives. NOTE: When installing R2.1.1 software you may see error messages about not being able to replace the following *.dll files: ginastub.dll and msvcr70.dll . These are known, non-critical issues that are being tracked and will be fixed in the next revision of software. 1.) Place the “Application Software” CDROM into the CDROM drive. 2.) Select the START button on the tool bar at the bottom of the LCD screen and select “ Run… ”. 3.) Enter “ g:\LoadSoftware ” into the dialog box as shown in Figure 8-17. Figure 8-17 Run Load Software 4.) You will see a screen that warns you that you are about to load software, press the Enter key or select OK to start the process. 5.) You will see a Command (CMD) window open as shown in Figure 8-18. 8-18 Section 8-6 - Loading Application Software

[Page 223] 8-6-1 Loading Applications Software (cont’d) Figure 8-18 Command Window 6.) As indicated, press any key to continue. The process is completely automated and provides you with messages as to its status. R2.1.1 Software provides the message in Figure 8-19. At this point you just have to wait while the software loads (Approximately 7-8 minutes). Figure 8-19 R2.1.1 Software Message NOTE: When the Information Window appears asking you to select OK, do nothing. This window will disappear automatically. Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-19

[Page 224] 8-6-1 Loading Applications Software (cont’d) 7.) When the process has completed, the window will turn dark red and you will see the following message in Figure 8-20. Figure 8-20 Software Load Complete 8.) When it completes loading the system will reboot. If possible while the system is rebooting remove the CD from the drive. If the CD is remove the system will automatically reboot into the applications software. If you didn’t remove the CD, don’t worry you will get a dialog box as in Figure 8-21. Figure 8-21 Start Software 9.) REMOVE the Applications CD 10.)From the Start Applications dialog box, select START. 11.)Select CANCEL. 8-20 Section 8-6 - Loading Application Software

[Page 225] Figure 8-22 Enter Option String 12.)During the reboot process, the system may ask for the option string (valid license) to be entered. When this happens, enter the option string provided in the installation paperwork. NOTE: Starting with R3.x Software, all systems must have at least the basic option string in order for the software to run. Any single option string may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic & B-Flow). Demo option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo option string in a unit when it is sold to a customer. The current R3.x Demo Option String expires 31 January, 2005. Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-21

[Page 226] Section 8-7 Upgrading Application Software 8-7-1 Applications Software Upgrade Procedure NOTE: When installing software you may see error messages about not being able to replace the following *.dll files: ginastub.dll and msvcr70.dll . These are known, non-critical issues that are being tracked and will be fixed in the next revision of software. WARNING WARNING While the software install procedure is designed to preserve data, you should save any patient data, images, system setups to a MOD or hardcopy. CAUTION Remember to remove the MOD before continuing with the software install. 1.) Place the “Application Software” CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. 2.) Power Down the scanner. 3.) Power up the scanner. Wait for a dialog box like the one in Figure 8-23. Figure 8-23 Start Application Window 8-22 Section 8-7 - Upgrading Application Software

[Page 227] 4.) Select INSTALL SW ... . 5.) There will be two dialog boxes popping up warning you that you are about to install new software as shown in Figure 8-24. In both cases click OK. Figure 8-24 StartLoader Dialog Boxes Figure 8-25 Command Window 6.) Another window will be displayed asking you to “Press any key to continue…”. Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-23

[Page 228] 7.) As indicated, press any key to continue. The process is completely automated and provides you with messages as to its status. R2.1.0 Software provides the message in Figure 8-26. Figure 8-26 R2.1.0 Software Message At this point you just have to wait while the software loads (Approximately 10 minutes). When the process has completed, the window will turn dark red and you will see the following message in Figure 8-27. Figure 8-27 Software Load Complete 8.) When it completes loading the system will reboot. 9.) Remove the CD from the drive If possible, while the system is rebooting remove the CD from the drive. If you didn’t do that don’t worry you will get a dialog box like the one shown in Figure 8-28. Figure 8-28 Start Software 10.)REMOVE the Applications CD 11.)From the Start Applications dialog box, select START. 12.)Select CANCEL. 8-24 Section 8-7 - Upgrading Application Software

[Page 229] Figure 8-29 Enter Option String 13.)During the reboot process, the system may ask for the option string (valid license) to be entered. When this happens, enter the option string provided in the installation paperwork. NOTE: Starting with R3.x Software, all systems must have at least the basic option string in order for the software to run. Any single option string may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic & B-Flow). Demo option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo option string in a unit when it is sold to a customer. The current R3.x Demo Option String expires 31 January, 2005. Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-25

[Page 230] Section 8-8 System Setup 8-8-1 To Complete the System Setup 1.) From the Touch Screen on the scanner, select Utility>Connectivity>TCPIP Tab . 2.) Ensure that DHCP is deselected so you can enter information manually. 3.) Input the DICOM information. * This should be the appropriate DICOM information for the system if it is on the hospital network. If it is not correct, input the correct data. 4.) After all information is entered select SAVE SETTINGS. 5.) iLinq Checkout will need to be completed again. refer to the iLinq Installation Manual. 8-8-2 VCR Setup 1.) Reset the VCR and choose a Default Line Printer by going to Utilities>System>Peripherals . 2.) Under VCR, Select Sony 9500 VCR and SAVE 3.) Under SETUP, Select the desired default line printer and SAVE 4.) Select Exit in the lower left-hand corner of the Touch Screen. 8-8-3 Printer Setup 1.) If the customer has a USB (Digital) Printer plug it in now. The system is in Windows mode it should recognize the printer and install the necessary driver. 2.) If you do not install the printer until after the Applications software has been loaded, you will need a service dongle to get into windows and follow the manual set up procedures in the LOGIQ™ 9 Peripheral Installation Manual 2341053-100. 8-8-4 Print Key Assignment and Checkout Because of the addition of more printer choices, digital and analog, the factory default print key configuration has been removed for the color and b/w printers. 1.) Determine which printers are configured on the system. The former factory defaults were Color = P3 and B/W = P2. 2.) Consult the customer to ensure which “Print” keys (P1-4) should be assigned to printers. 3.) Select Utility > Admin > Connectivity > Buttons >. Choose the desired print button. Under “Destinations”, select necessary printer choice from the drop-down list. 4.) Press the print key just configured and you should get a printout of the screen. 8-26 Section 8-8 - System Setup

[Page 231] 8-8-5 Restore Patient, Report, and User-Defined Presets 1.) Place the Backup/Restore media (MOD or CD-R) in the drive. 2.) Select the UTILITY tab on the Touch Panel. Select SYSTEM, then BACKUP/RESTORE. 3.) Select everything under Restore by placing a check mark after Patient Archive, Report Archive, System Configuration, and User Defined Configuration. Then press RESTORE. 8-8-6 Cycle System Power 1.) Do an auto-shut down 2.) Press the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu. 3.) Select SHUTDOWN from the SYSTEM - EXIT menu. Figure 8-30 System Exit Menu for Back-end Processor Power Down 4.) Power up the system for functional check-out. Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-27

[Page 232] Section 8-9 Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure 8-9-1 Manpower One person, 1 hour 8-9-2 Tools Hexagon key 2,5 and 3 mm Phillips screwdriver size 2 Socket 8 mm 8-9-3 Preparations 1.) Shut down the system. 2.) Remove Operator Panel. 3.) Remove XY- Handle Refer to the console Lock Assembly Removal Procedure 1.) Unscrew 8 (5 mm) and 2 (3 mm) hexagon screws. 2.) Take care of the spring. 3.) Remove the Console Lock Assembly. 8-9-4 Console Lock Assembly Installation Procedure 1.) Install the Lock Assembly. 2.) Install the spring. 3.) Fasten the 10 hexagon screws. 4.) Install Operator Panel. 8-28 Section 8-9 - Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure

[Page 233] Section 8-10 Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure 8-10-1 Manpower One person, 1 hour 8-10-2 Tools • Hexagon key 2,5 and 3 mm • Phillips screwdriver size 2 • Socket 8 mm 8-10-3 Preparations 1.) Shut down the system. 2.) Remove Operator Panel. 3.) Remove XY- Handle. Strap Screws Screws Screws Figure 8-31 Release Lock Assembly Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-29

[Page 234] 8-10-4 Release Lock Removal Procedure 1.) Unscrew 8 mm nut behind XY-Handle. 2.) Unscrew 2 hexagon screws (3 mm). 3.) Unscrew 4 hexagon screws (2,5 mm). 4.) Remove Release Lock Assembly. 8-10-5 Release Lock Installation Procedure 1.) Install Release Lock Assembly. 2.) Fasten 6 hexagon screws. 3.) Fasten nut behind XY- Handle. 4.) Install XY-Handle. 5.) Install Operator Panel. Strap Screws Screws Screws Figure 8-32 Release Lock Assembly 8-30 Section 8-10 - Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure

[Page 235] Chapter 9 Renewal Parts Section 9-1 Overview 9-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 9 This chapter gives you an overview of Spare Parts available for the LOGIQ™ 9. Table 9-1 Contents in Chapter 9 Section Description Page Number 9-1 Overview 9-1 9-2 List of Abbreviations 9-2 9-3 Parts List Groups 9-3 9-4 External Covers 9-4 9-5 Additional Console Hardware 9-6 9-6 Operator I/O Mechanical Parts 9-8 9-7 Mechanical Kits 9-9 9-8 Operator Control Panel Brackets 9-11 9-9 Operator Control Panel Assembly 9-12 9-10 Monitor Assembly 9-14 9-11 Front End Processor Assembly 9-15 9-12 I/O Interfaces 9-18 9-13 Back End Processor Assembly 9-19 9-14 Interconnect Cables 9-25 9-15 Power Distribution 9-36 9-16 Air Distribution 9-37 9-17 Peripherals 9-38 9-18 Voice Scan 9-39 9-19 Customer Documentation 9-40 9-20 Probes 9-41 Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-1

[Page 236] 9-1-2 LOGIQ™ 9 Models Numbers Table 9-2 LOGIQ™ 9 Model Designations Part Number Description 2188900 LOGIQ™ 9 120 V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0 2188900-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0 2188900-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP1.0 2188900-4 LOGIQ™ 9 120 V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.0 2188900-5 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.0 2188900-6 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.0 2351100 LOGIQ™ 9 120 V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02 2351100-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02 2351100-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02 2375600 LOGIQ™ 9 120 V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03 2375600-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03 2375600-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03 Section 9-2 List of Abbreviations • Assy - Assembly • BEP - Back End Processor • Ctrl - Control • FEP - Front End Processor • F.O.B - Flock of Birds or 3-D Option • FRU 1 - Replacement part available in parts hub • FRU 2 - Replacement part available from the manufacturer (lead time involved) • LCD - Liquid Crystal Display • Int -Internal • I/O - Input/Output • PWA - Printed Wire Assembly • Recv - Receive • XFRMR - Transformer 9-2 Section 9-2 - List of Abbreviations

[Page 237] Section 9-3 Parts List Groups Figure 9-1 Console Views Table 9-3 Parts Groups Item Part Group Name Table Number Description 100- External Covers Table 9-4 External covers and cavity fillers 140- Additional Console Hardware Table 9-5 170- Operator I/O Mechanical Parts Table 9-6 User Interface: Keyboard Trackball, TGC Assy., Foot 200 Operator Control Panel Assembly Table 9-10 Pedal Monitor, Rear Cover, Front Bezel, Mounting, Tilt, 300 Monitor Assembly Table 9-11 Swivel 400- Front End Processor Assembly Table 9-12 Xmit/Recv, Signal Pre-Processing, Control 450- I/O Interfaces Table 9-13 Front End/Back End Interface, BEP External Interface 470- Back End Processor Assembly Table 9-14 Table 9-15 500 Peripheral Cables Table 9-16 Table 9-17 600- Power Distribution Table 9-18 650- Air Distribution Parts Table 9-19 800- Customer Documentation Table 9-22 900- Probes Table 9-23 Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-3

[Page 238] Section 9-4 External Covers 103A 104A 109 110 Figure 9-2 External Covers 9-4 Section 9-4 - External Covers

[Page 239] Table 9-4 External Covers 101 Top Cover FB307383 1 1 102 Front Cover Assembly FC200076 with Two Labels, Apply the Appropriate Label 1 1 103 Right Side Cover Assembly FC200074 with bumper - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 1 with bumper and GE Logo. If ordering to replace non- 103A Right Side Cover Assembly FC200422 1 1 logo cover, also order FC200421 and replace set 104 Left Side Cover Assembly FC200073 with bumper - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 1 with bumper and GE Logo. If ordered to replace non- 104A Left Side Cover Assembly FC200421 1 1 logo cover, also order FC200422 and replace set 105 Rear Cover Assembly FC200077 with bumper - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 1 106 Rear Filter Cover FB200385 with brackets - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 1 107 Footrest Bumper FB307387 1 1 108 Color Printer Cavity Filler Insert FB307990 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 1 109 B/W Printer Cavity Filler Insert FB307989 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 1 110 VCR Cavity Filler Insert FB307988 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 1 111 Filter Media FB307903 Dust Filter - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 1 Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-5

[Page 240] Section 9-5 Additional Console Hardware 145A 150A 147 144 143 150 142 151A Figure 9-3 Additional Console Hardware 9-6 Section 9-5 - Additional Console Hardware

[Page 241] Table 9-5 Additional Console Hardware 141 Caster Hub Caps 2293008-5 Need to order 2 per caster, adhesive mounting 1 1 Does Not Have Pedal Activated Swivel Lock 142 Rear Casters (wheels) 2293008-3 Assembly. Manual Swivel Lock 2 1 - Same as Vivid 7 - Includes Swivel Lock Assembly 143 Front Casters (wheels) 2293008-2 2 1 - Same as Vivid 7 - 144 Shelf Cover 2291452 1 1 145 TV/TR Probe Holder Front 2291455 1 1 145A TV/TR Probe Holder Rear 2299040 146 Pocket Shelf Mat 2291453 1 1 147 Under Shelf Cover 2291454 1 2 148 Right Probe Holder Assembly 2299038 1 1 149 Left Probe Holder Assembly 2299039 1 1 150 Gel Warmer Assembly * see note 2291461 *Need to order GE Logo Decal 2269030-15 1 1 150A GE Logo Decal for Gel Warmer 2269030-15 Must order when replacing Gel Warmer 1 1 151 Gel Warmer Power Source 2329637 12VDC Power Source - Obsolete 1 1 151A Gel Warmer Power Source 2329637-3 6VDC Power Source 1 1 Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-7

[Page 242] Section 9-6 Operator I/O Mechanical Parts 177 176 170 172 171 Figure 9-4 OP I/O Mechanical Parts 9-8 Section 9-6 - Operator I/O Mechanical Parts

[Page 243] Table 9-6 Operator I/O Mechanical Parts 170 Top Console Upper Casting Assembly 2331665 Assembly for Service 1 2 171 Top Console Lower Casting Assembly 2331858 Assembly for Service 1 2 172 Frogleg (complete) FB200340 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 2 goes on back/top half of Frogleg arms 173 Frogleg Bumper Kit FC200086 1 1 - Same as Vivid 7 - 175 Rear Handle Assembly FB200406 with cable wrap hooks - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 1 176 Brake Lock Pedal FB307407 1 1 177 Directional Lock Pedal FB307409 Swivel Lock Pedal 1 1 178 Column Cover Kit FC200183 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 1 179 Top Console Lock Assembly FB200350 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 2 180 Lock Release FB200920 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 2 181 X-Y Release Handle FB307297 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 2 182 Z-Release Handle FB307296 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 2 183 Main Handle with Label FC200131 Front Handle with Label in center 1 1 184 Pedal Assembly FB200595 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 1 Section 9-7 Mechanical Kits Table 9-7 Kits, Overview Item PART NAME NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU BUMPER KIT, FROGLEG 1 BUMPER KIT FROGLEG FC200086 1 1 - Same as Vivid 7 - 2 COLUMN COVER KIT FC200183 COLUMN COVER KIT - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 1 Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-9

[Page 244] 9-7-1 Bumper Kit, Frogleg Figure 9-5 Bumper Kit, Frogleg, Base Seen From Above Table 9-8 Bumper Kit, Frogleg FC200086 ITEM PART NAME NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU 1 BUMPER CRASH PAD - Bumper Crash Rear 1 N 2 BUMPER INNER BOSS - - 1 N 3 BUMPER RIGHT FROGLEG - - 1 N 4 BUMPER LEFT FROGLEG - - 1 N 5 BUMPER INNER BOSS CRASH - - 2 N 9-10 Section 9-7 - Mechanical Kits

[Page 245] Section 9-8 Operator Control Panel Brackets Table 9-9 Operator Panel Brackets ITEM PART NAME NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU 190 Storage Tray Bracket 2306018 1 2 191 Upper Casting Bracket 2291449 1 2 192 “U” Bracket 2330476 ‘U’ Shaped Bracket, Nut is Attached to Casting 1 2 193 TV/TR Front Bracket 2306021 1 2 194 Bulkhead Bracket 2305886 Does Not Include Cables 1 2 Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-11

[Page 246] Section 9-9 Operator Control Panel Assembly 206A 201A 208 202 202A 203 204 Inside Touch Panel Assembly Figure 9-6 Operator Control Panel Assembly (Op I/O) 9-12 Section 9-9 - Operator Control Panel Assembly

[Page 247] Table 9-10 Operator Control Panel Assembly R3.X.X Software and above MUST USE 2188902-12 201 Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-2 1 1 Will cross to 2188902-12 when stock is depleted With Standby. Backward compatible. 201A Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-12 1 1 R3.X.X Software and above MUST USE Alpha Numeric Keyboard 202 A/N Keyboard - English 2188902-4 1 1 R3.X.X Software and above MUST USE 2188902-14 With Standby. Backward compatible. 202A A/N Analog Keyboard - English 2188902-14 1 1 R3.X.X Software and above MUST USE this part 203 Russian A/N Keyboard 2188902-20 As required 1 1 204 Greek A/N Keyboard 2188902-21 As required 1 1 205 Trackball 2188902-5 1 1 206 Upper Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-3 Will cross to a 2188902-13 when stock is depleted. 1 1 206A Upper Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-13 1 1 207 LCD Backlight Inverter 2188902-6 1 1 208 TGC PWA 2188902-7 1 1 209 Main Handle with Label FB200131 Front Handle with Label 1 1 Operator Panel Mode select Knob Kit Includes: 4 Mode select knobs (Inner & Outer pieces) 210 2188902-8 1 1 and Key Ring and Key Ring 211 Universal Knob Kit 2384216 Contains all blue knobs for the LOGIQ 9 and Vivid 7 Key caps for customer to customize the P1 - P4 key 212 Programmable Button Keytop Kit 2188902-9 1 1 caps Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-13

[Page 248] Section 9-10 Monitor Assembly 303 308 Figure 9-7 Monitor Assembly Table 9-11 Monitor Assembly 301 Open Frame Monitor 2283334 - Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7- 1 1 302 Monitor Cable Assembly 2304171 - Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7- 1 2 303 Speaker and Mounting Bracket Kit 2297882 2 2 304 Monitor Tilt/Swivel/Male Post 2284225 Neck Assembly 1 2 305 Monitor Rear Cover Assembly 2303930 Assembly with Speaker Grills 1 2 306 Monitor Left Speaker Grill 2279675 Labeled as the LEFT Speaker Grill 1 2 307 Monitor Right Speaker Grill 2279676 Labeled as the RIGHT Speaker Grill 1 2 Covers the screws on each side in the back of the 308 Monitor Screw Caps (covers) 2303932 2 2 cover - Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7- 309 Monitor Front Bezel Assembly 2303929 Includes three logos Vivid 7, LOGIQ 7 and LOGIQ 9 1 2 310 Monitor Switch Assembly 2297050 User Switch Assembly 1 2 9-14 Section 9-10 - Monitor Assembly

[Page 249] Section 9-11 Front End Processor Assembly 406A 404 403 407 406 402 402A BT’01 Card Rack 409A 409C 405 411 411A 411B Empty Card Slot 406B BT’02, BTCard Rack 405A 405B 409B Figure 9-8 Front End Processor Assembly Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-15

[Page 250] Section 9-11 Front End Processor Assembly (cont’d) Table 9-12 Front End Processor Assembly Applications Software R2.X.X R3.X.X LOGIQ 9 Model Number Part (BT’01) (BT’02) (BT’03) 2188900-X 2351100-X 2375600-X 2188900-X (BT’03 upgrade) 2351100-X (BT’03 upgrade) Item Part Name Number Description Qty FRU 401 Back Plane 2260219 X X X X X Front End Back Plane 1 2 Scan Control Board 402 SCB1 2260214-2 X 1 1 Use 2260214-3 if stock is depleted Scan Control Board - 402A SCB1.1 2260214-3 X 1 X 1 1 Required if using EBM Board 402B SCB2 2365739 X X X Has BT’03 Functionality 1 1 Combined functions of EQ4 & BMP4. Positioned in 411 EBM 2273639-3 X 2 X 1 1 the old EQ4 Slot. Needs SCB 2260214-3 EBM Board Upgraded to EBM2 functionality - 411A EBM1.8 2273639-5 X X X 1 N Replace with EBM2 2273639- 411B EBM2 X X X Has BT’03 Functionality 1 1 403 BMP4 2260207 X B-Mode Processor 1 1 404 EQ4 2260210 X Equalization Board 1 1 405 TD4 2260194-2 X X X X Transmit/Delay Board 8 1 New power requirements different from TD4. Can 405A TD5 2362863 X 8 1 not mix with TD4s. Requires FEPS3 Same Function as TD5 but larger and fewer ASICs. 405B TD5.1 2386031 X 8 1 You can mix TD5s and TD5.1s Radio Frequency Amplifier Board 406 RF AMP 2260212 X X 1 N Obsolete - Use 2341985-2 406A RF AMP1.2 2341985-2 X 3 X X 3 X Design Improvement 1 1 New power requirements different from 406B RF AMP2 2357621 X 1 1 RF AMP1.X - Requires FEPS3 407 XDIF 2260221 X X X X X Transmit Differential Board 1 1 Top Plane connects XDIF to 408 Top Plane 2291656 X X X X X 1 1 RF Amp on front of cards Front End Power Supply - First Generation Obsolete 409 FEPS 2260203 X When replaced with 2273641-3 or 2273641-4, 1 N requires replacement of the Front End Card Rack Cover in Kit 2374426 9-16 Section 9-11 - Front End Processor Assembly

[Page 251] Table 9-12 Front End Processor Assembly Applications Software R2.X.X R3.X.X LOGIQ 9 Model Number Part (BT’01) (BT’02) (BT’03) 2188900-X 2351100-X 2375600-X 2188900-X (BT’03 upgrade) 2351100-X (BT’03 upgrade) Item Part Name Number Description Qty FRU Second Generation FEPS Cross to a FEPS2.1 if stock is depleted 409A FEPS2 2273641-3 X 4 X 1 1 May require Front End Card Rack cover kit 2374426 if replacing a 2260203 FEPS 409C FEPS2.1 2273641-4 X 4 X 5 X X Second Generation with Standby Capabilities 1 1 Analog Voltages are +/- 6V and 13V compared to +/-6v and 12V found in FEPS, FEPS2 and FEPS2.1 409B FEPS3 2376843 X Must be used in systems with TD5.X and RF Amp2 1 1 (DO NOT use in R2.X.X systems or Systems upgraded to BT’03) FEP AC Line 410 2315960 X X X X X Attached to side of FEP Card Rack 1 1 Filter Required if upgrading from FEPS to FEPS2/FEP2.1 FEP Card Cage Has additional shielding around Top Plane area and 412 2374426 X X 1 1 Front Cover Kit Power Supply areas. Labels included in kit to match FEP configuration SCB1 can be used on this model number also. EBM can be used on this model replacing the BMP4 and EQ4. However EBM requires SCB1.1 at a minimum. RF Amp1.2 can be used in this model number also. FEPS2 and FEPS2.1 can be used on this model number. However, must also use FEP Card Rack Cover Kit 2374426. FEPS2.1 can also be used on these model numbers Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-17

[Page 252] Section 9-12 I/O Interfaces 452A 452 Figure 9-9 I/O Interfaces Table 9-13 I/O Interfaces 451 External I/O Assembly FB200198 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 1 - Same as Vivid 7 - 452 Internal I/O Assembly FB200197 1 N Obsolete - Use FC200423 - Same as Vivid 7 - 452A Internal I/O Assembly FC200423 Has gain increase for improved microphone 1 1 performance 9-18 Section 9-12 - I/O Interfaces

[Page 253] Section 9-13 Back End Processor Assembly 478 477A 477B 471 472 481 482 484 485 491 492 483 486 487 488 490 490A Figure 9-10 Back End Processor Assembly Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-19

[Page 254] Table 9-14 Back End Processor Assembly 471 Back End Processor (BEP1) 2266548-3 BEP1 - P3 Processor 1 1 Back End Processor (BEP1) P3 Processor with 3-D “Flock of Birds” option 472 2266548-4 1 1 w/ 3-D Option (PCI Bird Transmitter & Receiver NOT Included) 481 Back End Processor (BEP2.0) 2348186-3 P4 Processor 1 1 Back End Processor (BEP 2.0) P4 Processor with 3-D “Flock of Birds” option installed 482 2348186-4 1 1 w/ 3-D Option (PCI Bird Transmitter & Receiver NOT Included) 484 Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-13 P4 Processor with Digital VIC Card 1 1 P4 Processor (Digital VIC Card) Back End Processor (BEP 2.1) 485 2348186-14 with 3-D “Flock of Birds” option installed 1 1 w/ 3-D Option (PCI Bird Transmitter & Receiver NOT Included) 491 Back End Processor (BEP2.2) 2348186-63 With Version 2.3 Power Supply 1 1 Back End Processor (BEP 2.2) 492 2348186-64 With Version 2.3 Power Supply 1 1 w/ 3-D Option 483 Back End Processor Power Supply 2348186-38 Version 2.3 For ALL BEPs 1 1 473 3-D Externals - PCI Bird Transmitter 2301019-4 Option Kit 1 1 474 3-D Externals - PCI Bird Receiver 2301019-5 Option Kit 1 1 Multi-Tech - New installation requires cable kit 475 Global Modem Assembly 2245794 1 1 #2358850 -Same as Vivid 7 - Computer UPS Battery, located inside BEP Assy. 476 BEP Battery Assembly 2266548-5 Expected battery life is 3 years 1 2 -Same as Vivid 7 - 477 Base Image Load Software 2307061-xx * Operating System Software - Specific to the BEP1.x.x 1 2 477A Base Image Load Software 2352186-xx* Operating System Software - Specific to the BEP2.x.x 1 2 477B Base Image Load Software 2371612-2 Operating System Software - Specific to the BEP3.x.x 1 2 Ultrasound Operation Software, includes service 478 Applications Software 2307060-xx * 1 2 platform and diagnostics 490 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) BEP 1 2366650 Will need to transfer mounting tray to new HDD 1 1 490A Hard Disk Drive (HDD) BEP 2.x 2348186-31 Comes with bracket or mounting tray 1 1 486 CD-RW Drive 2348186-37 BEP 2.x Only -Same as Vivid 7 - 1 1 487 Patient I/O Module 2348186-22 BEP 2.x Only -Same as Vivid 7 - 1 1 488 MOD Drive 2348186-23 BEP 2.0 Only - 1.3 Gigabyte IDE - 3.5 inch 1 1 Mounted on BEP Chassis Cover 489 Fan 2348186-24 1 1 -Same as Vivid 7 - NOTE: * Contact the OnLine Center. Provide the BEP Part Number, Serial Number and PSP Rev Level 9-20 Section 9-13 - Back End Processor Assembly

[Page 255] 9-13-1 BEP Spare Parts Matrix Figure 9-11 BEP Spare Parts Matrix 1 of 3 Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-21

[Page 256] Figure 9-12 BEP Spare Parts Matrix 2 of 3 9-22 Section 9-13 - Back End Processor Assembly

[Page 257] Figure 9-13 BEP Spare Parts Matrix 3 of 3 Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-23

[Page 258] Figure 9-14 BEP Base Image Load Matrix 9-24 Section 9-13 - Back End Processor Assembly

[Page 259] Section 9-14 Interconnect Cables TO CARD RACK SONY VCR SVO-9500MD Remote Right 517B AUDIO OUT Left 503 SONY B/W PRINTER UP890MD Right AUDIO IN A8 Left B/W Video In A9 RS-232C A6 517A 504 A7 RS-232C SONY VIDEO OUT COLOR PRINTER A2 UP-2900MD A15 501 516B Video Output A11 VIDEO IN 530 COLOR PRNT RGB & Sync A10 516A VIDEO A1 Speaker OP PANEL Video/Mic Audio Amp A3 502 Mic Pre-Amp A14 AC Power Op Control MONITOR A4 USB, +12PC, MIC IN, AUDIO OUT 500 Video Rcvr A5 TOUCH PANEL USER INTERFACE VIDEO From BEP SVGA To Monitor From BEP B5 B6 B7 B8 B2 TO B1 INTERNAL I/O BOARD B3 B9 B4 INTERNAL I/O BOARD Figure 9-15 Peripheral Cable Diagram Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-25

[Page 260] Table 9-15 Peripheral Cables Top Console and Monitor to IIO, AC Ctrl, BEP and Gas spring - Same as Vivid 7 - 500 Console Cable Assembly (complete) FB200320 1 1 RGB & Sync From PCVIC to Color Printer - #1 -BEP- D5 to RGB Color Printer - Same as Vivid 7 - 501 Color Printer Video Cable FB200789 1 1 #2 - Same as Vivid 7 - 502 Color Printer Control Cable FB200790 1 1 #3 - IIO-A1 to BW/Color Printer - Same as Vivid 7 - 503 BW/CP Printer Cable FB200791 1 1 #4 - IIO-A2 to VCR - Same as Vivid 7 - 504 VCR Remote Control Cable FB200792 1 1 #16 - IIO-A10 to VCR IN - Same as Vivid 7 - 516A SVHS Cable, Shielded FC200041 2 1 9-26 Section 9-14 - Interconnect Cables

[Page 261] Table 9-15 Peripheral Cables #16 - IIO-A10 to VCR Out - Same as Vivid 7 - 516B SVHS Cable, Shielded FC200042 2 1 #17 - IIO-A6/A7 to VCR IN CH1(L)/CH2(R) - Same as Vivid 7 - 517A Audio Cable, Shielded FC200043 2 1 #17 - IIO-A6/A7 to VCR OutCH1(L)/CH2(R) - Same as Vivid 7 - 517B Audio Cable, Shielded FC200044 2 1 530 Speaker Cable - Bulkhead 2319024 1 1 Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-27

[Page 262] To Color Printer AC DISTRIBUTION To VCR BOX To BW Printer # 500 AC CONTROL Part of Main Cable BOX P7 To Op Panel XFMR BOX P5 P8 515 AC Modem Adapter P6 P9 To BEP Optional Global P10 Modem Assembly #475 AC Outlet 541 542 P11 To FEP Card Rack P100 To add a modem to a P101 system that does not have one, you must order the Global INTERNAL I/O Modem Assembly and Cable Kit 2368850 A14 507 Fan 507A A13 A16 A15 A12 Figure 9-16 AC Distribution Cable Diagram Table 9-16 AC Distribution Cables #7 - IIO-A15 to ACP-F8 507 Fan Speed Control Cable FB200795 1 1 #7 - IIO-A15 to ACP-F8 Fan Speed Control Cable if EQ4 PWA 507A 2333827 1 1 (2260210) is Rev K or earlier Includes FB200802-1, FB200802-2, FB200802-3 & 513 AC-Distribution Cable Kit FB200802 FB200802-4 1 1 #14 - ACT-M1 to ACP-F6 - Same as Vivid 7 - 514 AC Mains 1 Cable FB200803 1 1 9-28 Section 9-14 - Interconnect Cables

[Page 263] Table 9-16 AC Distribution Cables #15 - ACT-M2 to ACP-F7 - Same as Vivid 7 - 515 AC Mains 2 Cable FB200804 1 1 540 AC Peripheral Cable 070C5080 AC to Color & B/W Printers and VCR 3 1 541 AC Power Cord - USA 2162856 1 1 542 AC Power Cord - Outside USA 2118615 1 1 Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-29

[Page 264] AUDIO TO VCR AUDIO FROM VCR TO VCR SPARE TO PRINTERS SVIDEO FROM VCR SVIDEO TO VCR SVGA VIDEO OUT SVIDEO OUT BW VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT TRIGGER AUDIO R AUDIO L 10/100bT SERIAL FOOTSWITCH REMOTE EXP 1 REMOTE EXP 2 USB PHONE TO OP PANEL FROM MODEM Cable # 500 Cable # 517A Cable # 504 Cable # 502 Cable # 516B Cable # 516A C Cable # 517B Cable # 503 2 1 PORT TO MODEM Cable # 506 EXTERNAL I/O A6 A7 A8 A9 2 1 RS232 B6 B5 B9 B4 B3 B1 B2 B7 B8 TO IMAGE MONITOR TO COLOR PRINTER TO FRONT END CARD RACK SCB TO LCD FLAT PANEL Cable # 531 Cable # 529 Cable # 510 Cable # 511 Cable # 508 Cable # 520 Cable # 500 Cable # 519 Cable # 518 Cable # 509 Cable # 500 C5 D1 Cable # 508 Cable # 501 C16 D2 D4 D5 D3 C18 C13 C17 C4 C3 C6 KEY C12 C10 C11 C9 C7 OPTION 50M 68M PS_ON SVGA IN PCI SLOT 4 PC2IP PCI SLOT 3 PCI SLOT 2 PCI SLOT 1 AGP SLOT PCI SLOT 5 USB1 USB2 COM1 COM2 PC POWER PC ON/OFF RS232(X3) PC2IP 10/100bT PARALLEL SVGA OUT 2 SCAN NON-PCI SLOT S/C VIDEO OUT MIC IN (PINK) CONVERT PCI BIRD AGP VIDEO SOUND CARD PC-VIC & PC2IO AUDIO LINE OUT (GRN) I2C PSON POK RS422 OPTIONAL 3 D CARD SUPPLY RS232 (X4) TO POWER PC I/O PC PCI DIGITALVIDEO (LVDS) ADVANCED INPUT DEVICES 2266548-3 BEP 1.0 without 3D option 2266548-4 BEP 1.0 with 3D option BEP1.0 Figure 9-17 BEP 1.0 and II/O Cabling Diagram 9-30 Section 9-14 - Interconnect Cables

[Page 265] SVIDEO FROM VCR AUDIO TO VCR AUDIO FROM VCR TO VCR SPARE TO PRINTERS SVIDEO TO VCR SVGA VIDEO OUT SVIDEO OUT BW VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT TRIGGER AUDIO R AUDIO L 10/100bT SERIAL FOOTSWITCH REMOTE EXP 1 REMOTE EXP 2 USB PHONE TO OP PANEL FROM MODEM Cable # 500 Cable # 516B Cable # 516A C Cable # 504 Cable # 502 Cable # 503 2 1 PORT TO MODEM Cable # 506 Cable # 517A Cable # 517B EXTERNAL I/O 2 1 A6 A7 A8 A9 2 1 RS232 B6 B5 B9 B4 B8 B3 B1 B2 B7 TO IMAGE MONITOR TO ANALOG COLOR PRINTER Cable # 520 TO FRONT END CARD RACK SCB Cable # 509 Cable # 519 Cable # 518 Cable # 531 Cable # 529 Cable # 510 Cable # 511 Cable # 508 Cable # 500 TO LCD FLAT PANEL Cable # 534 NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED D1 Cable # 500 Cable # 501 D2 D4 D5 D3 C16 C12 C18 C10 C11 C9 C13 C17 C4 C3 C6 C5 C18 C19 C20 C21 OPTION KEY 50M 68M PS_ON SVGA IN PCI SLOT 6 PCI SLOT 5 PC2IP PCI SLOT 4 PCI SLOT 3 PCI SLOT 2 PCI SLOT 1 AGP SLOT USB1 USB2 COM1 PORT USB3 USB4 USB5 USB6 RS232(X3) PC2IP 10/100bT PC POWER PC ON/OFF SVGA OUT 2 SCAN AGP VIDEO PARALLEL S/C VIDEO OUT CONVERT MIC IN (PINK) NOT USED NOT USED PC-VIC & PC2IO AUDIO LINE OUT (GRN) PC I/O PC I2C PSON POK PCI DIGITALVIDEO (LVDS) Optional 3D Interface Card RS422 UPS Control to the RS232 (X4) BEP Power Supply ADVANCED INPUT DEVICES SOUND CARD 2348186-3 BEP 2.0 without 3D option 2348186-4 BEP 2.0 with 3D option BEP2.0 Figure 9-18 BEP 2.0 and II/O Cabling Diagram Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-31

[Page 266] MODEM (option) SVIDEO FROM VCR AUDIO TO VCR AUDIO FROM VCR TO VCR SPARE TO ANALOG PRINTERS Not used with Digital Peripherals SVIDEO TO VCR SVGA VIDEO OUT SVIDEO OUT BW VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT TRIGGER AUDIO R AUDIO L 10/100bT SERIAL FOOTSWITCH REMOTE EXP 1 REMOTE EXP 2 USB PHONE TO OP PANEL Cable # 500 w/ Modem Cable # 516B Cable # 516A C Cable # 504 Cable # 502 Cable # 503 2 1 PORT Cable # 517A Cable # 517B EXTERNAL I/O Cable # 506 A6 A7 A8 A9 LINE OUT FROM BEP 2 1 RS232 MIC TO BEP LINE IN TO BEP B6 B5 B9 B4 B8 B3 B1 B2 B7 Cable # 509 TO IMAGE MONITOR Cable # 533 Cable # 532 TO ANALOG COLOR PRINTER Cable # 520 TO FRONT END CARD RACK SCB Cable # 509 Cable # 519 Cable # 518 Cable # 531 Cable # 500 TO DIGITAL COLOR PRINTER TO DIGITAL B/W PRINTER Cable # 529 Cable # 510 Cable # 511 Cable # 508A Cable # 500 TO LCD FLAT PANEL NOT USED Cable # 534 D1 Cable # 501 D2 D5 D3 C16 C12 C18 C10 C11 C9 C30 C13 C17 C4 C3 C6 C5 C18 C19 C20 C21 OPTION KEY 50M D4 Not Used 68M PS_ON DVI IN PCI SLOT 6 PCI SLOT 5 PC2IP PCI SLOT 4 PCI SLOT 3 PCI SLOT 2 PCI SLOT 1 AGP SLOT USB1 USB2 COM1 PORT USB3 USB4 USB5 USB6 PC POWER PC ON/OFF RS232(X3) PC2IP 10/100bT PARALLEL SVGA OUT 2 DVI to S/C VIDEO OUT Analog MIC IN (PINK) NOT USED VIDEO OUT DG-VIC & DG2IO AUDIO LINE OUT (GRN) ADD CARD - DIGITAL MOTHERBOARD AGP VIDEO - PC I/O PC I2C PSON POK PCI DIGITALVIDEO (LVDS) Optional 3D Interface Card RS422 RS232 (X4) UPS Control to the BEP Power Supply ADVANCED INPUT DEVICES SOUND CARD 2348186-13 BEP 2.1 without 3D option 2348186-14 BEP 2.1 with 3D option BEP2.1 Figure 9-19 BEP 2.1/2.2 and II/O Cabling Diagram 9-32 Section 9-14 - Interconnect Cables

[Page 267] From Front Panel to Front End Processor - #5 505 Doppler Cable FB200793 1 1 From Modem to External I/O - #6 Packaged with FB200802-1 (modem power cable) and used with Modem Option kit 506 Standard Modem Cable FB200794 1 1 BEP AGP Video to PCVIC Card SVGA - #8 - BEP- C13 to BEP-D3 - Same as Vivid 7 - 508 Monitor Cable Standard FB200796 1 1 Interface from AGP Slot ADD card to DGVIC 508A Digital Video Interface Cable 2354056 1 1 BEP 2.1 #9 - IIO-B7 to BEP-C6 or IIO-B8 to BEP-C7 Used with 2364642 in BEP 2.x Systems - Same as Vivid 7 - 509 RS232 Com 1/2 Cable FB200797 2 1 #10 - IIO-B6 to BEP-D2 - Same as Vivid 7 - Internal I/O-PC2IO Power/Control 510 FB200798 1 1 Cable 511 Internal I/O-PC2IO Signals Cable FB200799 #11 - Obsolete Use FC200286 - 1 N 511A Internal I/O-PC2IO Signals Cable FC200286 1 1 #11A BEP D1 to IIO B5 Same as Vivid 7 - Improved flex and length #18 - Same as Vivid 7 - 518 USB A-B Cable 070D2802 2 1 Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-33

[Page 268] #19 - Same as Vivid 7 - 519 Ethernet Cat-5 Cable 070D2902 1 1 PCI Bus Extension Cable BEP to FEP - #20 - Same as Vivid 7 - 520 PCI Cable, AMP 974298 070M0016 1 1 #29 - IIO-B4 to BEP-AUD - Same as Vivid 7 - 529 Internal I/O-PC Audio Cable FB200748 1 1 531 UPS Control Cable FC200016 1 1 From USB #6 to Digital B/W Printer - BEP 2.1 532 Digital B/W Printer Cable 1 1 Straight USB, gray in color 2363062 From USB #5 to Digital Color Printer (USB to SCSI) 533 Digital Color Printer Cable 1 1 BEP 2.1, Right angle USB, black in color From USB #3 To Serial Cable To Internal I/O B7 - Obsolete Use 2364642 and FB200797 534 USB to Serial Adapter Cable 2348186-26 1 1 9-34 Section 9-14 - Interconnect Cables

[Page 269] From USB #3 To Serial Cable FB200797 To Internal I/O B7 (Ext I/O Com Port) BEP 2.0 & 2.1 534A USB to Serial Adapter Cable 2364642 1 1 535 USB to SCSI Adapter 2354406 From USB to SCSI for Sony UP-D50 input 1 1 Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-35

[Page 270] Section 9-15 Power Distribution 604A 603A Figure 9-20 Power Distribution Table 9-18 Power Distribution Card Rack Power Supply PWA 601 2260203 Power Supplies are mounted on the circuit board 1 1 Assembly (FEPS) 602 AC Transformer Assembly FB200581 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 2 100-120 VAC Systems - Same as Vivid 7 603 AC CTRL ASSY, 100-120 V FC200079 1 N Obsolete Use FC200403 603A AC CTRL ASSY, 100-120 V FC200403 100-120 VAC Systems - Same as Vivid 7 1 1 220-240 VAC Systems - Same as Vivid 7 604 AC CTRL ASSY, 220-240 V FC200081 1 N Obsolete Use FC200404 604A AC CTRL ASSY, 220-240 V FC200404 220-240 VAC Systems - Same as Vivid 7 1 1 USA and Japan 606 Power Cord 110Vac 2286301 1 1 607 Power Cord 220-240 Vac 2218615 1 1 608 AC Power Harness 2315960 Line Filter and Power Harness to FEPS 1 1 9-36 Section 9-15 - Power Distribution

[Page 271] Section 9-16 Air Distribution Figure 9-21 Air Distribution Parts Table 9-19 Air Distribution Parts 651 Fan Assembly FB200580 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 1 652 Air Intake Cover FB307379 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 1 653 Filter FB307903 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 1 Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-37

[Page 272] Section 9-17 Peripherals Figure 9-22 Peripherals Table 9-20 Approved Peripherals 2117635 700 Sony VCR 9500 M2D H4700TC 1 2 (T3306ER) 700A Sony VCR 9500 E10031AC PAL Version (Europe) 2207254 701 Sony 2900 Color Video Printer H4700TD 1 2 (T3306PT) 701A Sony 2900 Color Video Printer ECat European Replacement 702 Sony Color Printer UP51MD 2281966 H4700TH 1 2 702A Sony Color Printer UP51MD ECat European Replacement 703 Sony B/W Video Printer UP895MD 2288502 E8210B 1 2 704 Inkjet Page printer 2301163 H4700PL 1 2 704A Inkjet Page printer ECat European Replacement 705 3 Position Footswitch FB200723 HK45011AK - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 2 706 Sony UP-D895MD 2358588 Digital B/W Printer 1 2 707 Sony UP-D50MD 2358596 Digital Color Printer 1 Sony UP-D21MD 2351318 Digital Color Printer (small footprint) 1 Sony UP-21MD 2358449 Analog Color Printer (small footprint) 1 Sony UP-21 & D21 Adapter kit 2351082 Mounting plate, cover tray and screws 1 9-38 Section 9-17 - Peripherals

[Page 273] Section 9-18 Voice Scan Figure 9-23 Voice Scan Replacement Parts Table 9-21 Voice Scan 750 Wireless Receiver 2383770 1 1 751 Battery Eliminator Cable 2383769 1 1 752 Audio to USB Adapter 2383765 1 1 753 Audio Cable from Receiver 2383768 1 1 754 Power Cable for Receiver 2383767 1 1 755 Tray for Wireless Receiver 2377599 1 2 756 Foam - Wireless Receiver Bottom 2377600 1 2 757 Foam - Wireless Receiver Top 2377601 1 2 758 AC Adapter - 9V, 1.1A 2384314 1 1 759 USB Extension Cable 2384449 1 1 760 Battery Charger 2383775 1 1 Battery - 9V NiMH 2383776 3 1 Microphone 2383779 Over the ear style 1 1 USB Headset 2386172 1 1 Wireless Microphone Care Kit 2386142 1 1 Beltpack Transmitter - Wireless 2383773 1 1 Adapter Kit - 240Vac 2390117 1 1 Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-39

[Page 274] Section 9-19 Customer Documentation Figure 9-24 Customer Documentation Package Table 9-22 Documentation Box Contents Customer Documentation Collector 2376865 Includes items 800-808 1 N All available documents in PDF format. Can be LOGIQ™ 9 Customer Documentation 800 2353630-200 viewed on the scanner or any PC Includes service 1 N CD and user manuals. Basic Installation and how to view documents on the 801 LOGIQ™ 9 Installation Manual 2301715-100 1 N CD 802 LOGIQ™ 9 Quick Guide 2309820-100 Basic scanner operation 1 N 803 LOGIQ™ 9 Release Notes 2320595-100 R2.1.0 Software 1 N 804 LOGIQ™ 9 Release Notes Addendum 2376420-100 R2.1.1 Addendum 1 N 805 LOGIQ™ 9 Quick Card #1 2309821-100 1 N 806 LOGIQ™ 9 EFBW Quick Card 2323180-100 EFBW Procedures 1 N LOGIQ™ 9 AUA vs. CUA (linear 807 2323181-100 AUA vs. CUA 1 N regression) 808 LOGIQ™ 9 Op Panel P-Key Labels 2376993 Labels for Print Key assignments 1 N 9-40 Section 9-19 - Customer Documentation

[Page 275] Section 9-20 Probes 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 Figure 9-25 LOGIQ™ 9 Probes Table 9-23 Available Probes 901 3.5C 2296158 1 902 M7C 2294514 1 903 E8C 2294641 1 904 7L 2294521 1 905 10L 2294523 1 906 M12L 2294511 1 907 i12L 2264883 1 908 4S 2295658 1 909 10S 2298589 1 910 8C 2348094 1 911 TCD 3S 2323337 1 912 3.5CS 2051858 1 913 Probe Latching Mechanism 2130769 Large round blue locking knob used on some probes 1 Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-41

[Page 276] This page was intentionally left blank. 9-42 Section 9-20 - Probes

[Page 277] Chapter 10 Periodic Maintenance Section 10-1 Overview 10-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 10 This chapter describes Periodic Maintenance (PM) and customer performed tasks on the scanner and peripherals. These procedures are intended to maintain the quality of the ultrasound systems performance. Read this chapter completely and familiarize yourself with the procedures before performing a task. Table 10-1 Contents in Chapter 10 Section Description Page Number 10-1 Overview 10-1 10-2 Why do Periodic Maintenance 10-2 10-3 Maintenance Task Schedule 10-2 10-4 Tools Required 10-4 10-5 System Periodic Maintenance 10-5 10-6 Using a Phantom 10-10 10-7 Electrical Safety Tests 10-10 10-8 When There's Too Much Leakage Current... 10-23 PM INSPECTION Certificate 10-24 CAUTION Practice good ESD prevention. Wear an anti–static strap when handling electronic parts and even when disconnecting/connecting cables. DANGER THERE ARE SEVERAL PLACES ON THE BACKPLANE, THE AC DISTRIBUTION, AND DC DISTRIBUTION THAT ARE DANGEROUS. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG AND OPEN THE MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER BEFORE YOU REMOVE ANY PARTS. BE CAUTIOUS WHENEVER POWER IS STILL ON AND COVERS ARE REMOVED. CAUTION Do not pull out or insert circuit boards while power is ON. CAUTION Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System performance and cooling require this. Chapter 10 Periodic Maintenance 10-1

[Page 278] Section 10-2 Why do Periodic Maintenance 10-2-1 Keeping Records It is good business practice that ultrasound facilities maintain records of periodic and corrective maintenance. The Ultrasound Periodic Maintenance Inspection Certificate provides the customer with documentation that the ultrasound scanner is maintained on a periodic basis. A copy of the Ultrasound Periodic Maintenance Inspection Certificate should be kept in the same room or near the scanner. 10-2-2 Quality Assurance In order to gain accreditation from organizations such as the American College of Radiology (USA), it is the customer’s responsibility to have a quality assurance program in place for each scanner. The program must be directed by a medical physicists, the supervising radiologist/physician or appropriate designee. Routine quality control testing must occur regularly. The same tests are performed during each period so that changes can be monitored over time and effective corrective action can be taken. Testing results, corrective action and the effects of corrective action must be documented and maintained on the site. Your GE service representative can help you with establishing, performing and maintaining records for a quality assurance program. Section 10-3 Maintenance Task Schedule 10-3-1 How often should maintenance tasks be performed? The Maintenance Task Schedule specifies how often your LOGIQ™ 9 should be serviced and what items need attention. It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the LOGIQ™ 9 periodic maintenance is performed as scheduled in order to retain its high level of safety, dependability and performance. Your GE Service Representative knows your LOGIQ™ 9 best and can provide competent, efficient service. Please contact us for further information and to schedule GE Medical Systems Ultrasound to perform this service for you. The services and intervals shown in the maintenance schedule assumes that you use your LOGIQ™ 9 for an average patient load (10-12 per day) and not use it as a primary mobile unit which is transported between diagnostic facilities. If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load, then it is recommended to increase the periodic maintenance frequencies. 10-2 Section 10-2 - Why do Periodic Maintenance

[Page 279] Table 10-2 Customer Performed Maintenance Tasks Per Facilities Service at Indicated Time Daily Weekly Monthly QA Program Notes Clean Probes •* * or before each use Clean Probe Holders • more frequently depending on Clean Air Filter • your environment Inspect AC Mains Cable • Mobile Unit Check Weekly Inspect Cables and Connectors • Clean Console • Clean Monitor and Touch Panel • Inspect Wheels, Casters, brakes and • Mobile Unit Check Daily Swivel Locks Check Control Panel Movement • Mobile Unit Check Daily also after corrective See Note 1 Console Leakage Current Checks maintenance or as required by See Note 2 your facilities QA program also after corrective See Note 1 Peripheral Leakage Current Checks maintenance or as required by See Note 2 your facilities QA program also after corrective See Note 1 Surface Probe Leakage Current Checks maintenance or as required by See Note 2 your facilities QA program also after corrective Endocavity Probe Leakage See Note 1 maintenance or as required by Current Checks See Note 2 your facilities QA program also after corrective Transesphongeal Probe Leakage See Note 1 maintenance or as required by Current Checks See Note 2 your facilities QA program also after corrective Surgical Probe Leakage See Note 1 maintenance or as required by Current Checks See Note 2 your facilities QA program also after corrective See Note 1 Measurement Accuracy Checks maintenance or as required by See Note 2 your facilities QA program also after corrective See Note 1 Probe/Phantom Checks maintenance or as required by See Note 2 your facilities QA program also after corrective See Note 1 Functional Checks maintenance or as required by See Note 2 your facilities QA program Note 1: These specific tasks are completed during GE performed PMs or any time corrective maintenance is performed by GE. Note 2: May require specialized equipment to complete. Chapter 10 Periodic Maintenance 10-3

[Page 280] Section 10-4 Tools Required 10-4-1 Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment 10-4-1-1 Specific Requirements for Periodic Maintenance Table 10-3 Overview of Requirements for Periodic Maintenance Tool Part Number Comments Digital Volt Meter (DVM) 46–194427P231 Kit includes anti–static mat, wrist strap and cables for 200 to 240 46–194427P279 V system Anti Static Kit 46–194427P369 3M #2204 Large adjustable wrist strap 46–194427P373 3M #2214 Small adjustable wrist strap 46–194427P370 3M #3051 conductive ground cord 46–194427P278 120V Anti Static Vacuum Cleaner 46–194427P279 230V Air Filter air intake Safety Analyzer 46–285652G1 DALE 600 KIT (or equivalent) for electrical tests E7010GG 60 minute SVHS VCR Cassette E7010GF 120 minute SVHS VCR Head Cleaner See VCR user manual for requirements E8381AA blank 128 M disk E8381AB blank 230 M disk 3.5” MOD MEDIA 5.25” MOD Media 3.5” MOD Media Cleaner 2117811 cleans the diskettes 5.25” MOD Media Cleaner cleans the diskettes 3.5” MOD Head Cleaner Kit 2148392 cleans the drive heads 5.25” MOD Head Cleaner Kit cleans the drive heads QIQ Phantom E8370RB RMI Grayscale Target Model 403GS B/W Printer Cleaning Sheet See printer user manual for requirements Color Printer Cleaning Sheet See printer user manual for requirements Disposable Gloves 10-4 Section 10-4 - Tools Required

[Page 281] Section 10-5 System Periodic Maintenance 10-5-1 Preliminary Checks The preliminary checks take about 15 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation whenever necessary. Table 10-4 System Preliminary Checks 1 Ask & Listen Ask the customer if they have any problems or questions about the equipment. Fill in the top of the Periodic Maintenance (PM) Inspection Certificate. Note all probes and system 2 Paperwork options. Turn the system power on and verify that all fans and peripherals turn on. Watch the displays during 3 Power up power up to verify that no warning or error messages are displayed. 4 Probes Verify that the system properly recognizes all probes. 5 Displays Verify proper display on the monitor and touch panel. 6 Presets Backup all customer presets on an CD-RW. Chapter 10 Periodic Maintenance 10-5

[Page 282] 10-5-2 Functional Checks (See Also Chapter 4) The functional checks take about 60 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation whenever necessary. 10-5-2-1 System Checks Table 10-5 System Functional Checks Chec k Step Description Verify basic B-Mode (2D) operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode B-Mode of operation. Verify basic CF-Mode (Color Flow Mode) operation. Check the basic system controls that CF-Mode affect this mode of operation. Verify basic Doppler operation (PW and CW if available). Check the basic system controls Doppler Modes that affect this mode of operation. Verify basic M-Mode operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of M-Mode operation. Verify the basic operation of all optional modes such as Multi-Image, 3D, Contrast, *Applicable Software Harmonics, Cine, Stress Echo,... etc. Check the basic system controls that affect each Options options operation. Use the Visual Channel Utilityon the 10L probe to verify that all system xmit/recv channels Xmit/Recv Elements are functional. Keyboard Test Perform the Keyboard Test Procedure to verify that all keyboard controls are OK. Monitor Verify basic Monitor display functions. Refer to Chapter 3 of the User Manual. Touch Panel Verify basic Touch Panel display functions. Refer to Chapter 3 of the User Manual. Scan a gray scale phantom and use the measurement controls to verify distance and area Measurements calculation accuracy. Refer to the User Manual, Chapter 18, for measurement accuracy specifications. NOTE: * Some software may be considered standard depending upon system model configuration. 10-6 Section 10-5 - System Periodic Maintenance

[Page 283] 10-5-2-2 Peripheral/Option Checks If any peripherals or options are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted. Refer to the User Manual for a list of approved peripherals/options. Table 10-6 GE Approved Peripheral/Hardware Option Functional Checks 1 VCR Verify record/playback capabilities of the VCR. Clean heads and covers if necessary. 2 B/W Printer Verify hardcopy output of the B/W video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary. 3 Color Printer Verify hardcopy output of the Color video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary. 4 DICOM Verify that DICOM is functioning properly. Send an image to a DICOM device. Verify that InSite is functioning properly. Ensure two-way remote communications. 5 InSite/iLinq (Warranty & Contract Customers only) 6 Camera Verify hardcopy output of the film camera. Clean as necessary. 7 Footswitch Verify that the footswitch is functioning as programed. Clean as necessary. 8 ECG Verify basic operation with customer 10-5-3 Input Power 10-5-3-1 Mains Cable Inspection Table 10-7 Mains Cable Inspection 1 Unplug Cord Disconnect the mains cable from the wall and system. 2 Inspect Inspect it and its connectors for damage of any kind. Verify that the LINE, NEUTRAL and GROUND wires are properly attached to the terminals, and that no 3 Verify strands may cause a short circuit. 4 Verify Inlet connector retainer is functional. 10-5-4 Cleaning 10-5-4-1 General Cleaning Table 10-8 General Cleaning Use a fluid detergent in warm water on a soft, damp cloth to carefully wipe the entire system. Be careful 1 Console not to get the cloth too wet so that moisture does not enter the console. 2 Probe Holder Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel). Chapter 10 Periodic Maintenance 10-7

[Page 284] 10-5-4-2 Air Filter Cleaning Table 10-9 Air Filter Cleaning - frequency varies with your environment Remove Filter 1 Refer to Chapter 8 for air filter location and removal instructions. Cover The filters can be cleaned in sprinkling water, or they can be dusted with a vacuum cleaner. If the filter 2 Clean Filter is metal wash and/or vacuum. If the filter is fiber or plastic vacuum or replace. 3 Install Filter Install the clean filter. NOTE: For your convenience or of the air filter is too dirty, replacement filters are available. Refer to Chapter 9 for the air filter replacement part number. 10-5-5 Physical Inspection Table 10-10 Physical Checks 1 Labeling Verify that all system labeling is present and in readable condition. 2 Scratches & Dents Inspect the console for dents, scratches or cracks. 3 Control Panel Inspect keyboard and control panel. Note any damaged or missing items. Control Panel Verify ease of control panel (Operator I/O Panel) movement in all acceptable directions. Ensure that Movement it latches in position as required. Check all wheels and casters for wear and verify operation of foot brake, to stop the unit from moving, 5 Wheels & Brakes and release mechanism. Check all caster locks and caster swivel locks for proper operation. Cables & Check all internal cable harnesses and connectors for wear and secure connector seating. Pay Connectors special attention to footswitch assembly and probe strain or bend reliefs. Shielding & Check to ensure that all EMI shielding, internal covers, air flow panels and screws are in place. Covers Missing covers and hardware could cause EMI/RFI problems while scanning. 8 External I/O Check all connectors for damage and verify that the labeling is good. 9 Op Panel Lights Check for proper operation of all operator panel and TGC lights. 10 Monitor Light Check for proper operation of any monitor lights if available. External 11 Check for proper operation of any external microphones by recording an audio test. Microphone 10-8 Section 10-5 - System Periodic Maintenance

[Page 285] 10-5-6 Optional Diagnostic Checks To complete the PM checks, access the diagnostic software as described in Chapters 5 or 7. View the error logs and run desired diagnostics. 10-5-6-1 View the Logs 1.) Review the system error log for any problems. 2.) Check the temperature log to see if there are any trends that could cause problems in the future. 10-5-7 Probe Maintenance 10-5-7-1 Probe Related Checks Table 10-11 Probe Related Checks 1 Probe Holder Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel). Thoroughly check the system probe connectors and remove dust from inside the connector sockets 2 Probes if necessary. Visually check for bent, damaged or missing pins 10-5-7-2 Basic Probe Care The system user manuals and various probe handling cards provide a complete description of probe care, maintenance, cleaning and disinfection. Ensure that you are completely familiar with the proper care of GE probes. Ultrasound probes can be easily damaged by improper handling. See the User Manual and probe care cards for more details. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage. Failure to properly handle or maintain a probe may also void its warranty. Any evidence of wear indicates the probe cannot be used. Do a visual check of the probe pins and system sockets before plugging in a probe. TEE and Interoperative probes often have special considerations and individual probe user manuals. For TEE and Interoperative probes also refer to their separate user manuals. 10-5-7-3 Basic Probe Cleaning Refer to the User’s Manual for details on probe cleaning. NOTE: To help protect yourself from blood borne diseases, wear approved disposable gloves. These are made of nitrile derived from vegetable starch to prevent allergic latex reactions. NOTE: Failure to follow the prescribed cleaning or disinfection procedures will void the probe’s warranty. DO NOT soak or wipe the lens with any product not listed in the User Manual. Doing so could result in irreparable damage to the probe. Follow care instructions that came with the probe. NOTE: Disinfect a defective probe before you return it. Be sure to tag the probe as being disinfected. Chapter 10 Periodic Maintenance 10-9

[Page 286] Section 10-6 Using a Phantom See the Basic User Manual “ Customer Maintenance ” for information on using a phantom and quality assurance tests. Section 10-7 Electrical Safety Tests 10-7-1 Safety Test Overview The electrical safety tests in this section are based on and conform to NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards. They are intended for the electrical safety evaluation of cord-connected, electrically operated, patient care equipment. If additional information is needed, refer to the NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 documents. WARNING WARNING THE USER MUST ENSURE THAT THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS ARE PERFORMED AT LEAST EVERY 12 MONTHS ACCORDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE PATIENT SAFETY STANDARD IEC-EN 60601-1. ONLY TRAINED PERSONS ARE ALLOWED TO PERFORM THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS MENTIONED ABOVE. CAUTION To avoid electrical shock, the unit under test must not be connected to other electrical equipment. Remove all interconnecting cables and wires. The unit under test must not be contacted by users or patients while performing these tests. CAUTION Possible risk of infection. Do not handle soiled or contaminated probes and other components that have been in patient contact. Follow appropriate cleaning and disinfecting procedures before handling the equipment. Test the system, peripherals and probes for leakage current. Excessive leakage current can cause injury or death in sensitive patients. High leakage current can also indicate degradation of insulation and a potential for electrical failure. Do not use probes or equipment having excessive leakage current. To minimize the risk that a probe may shock someone the customer should: • Not use a probe that is cracked or damaged in any way .i.Probe Leakage Current, Frequency; • Check probe leakage current: * Based on your facilities QA program for surface probes * Based on your facilities QA program for endocavitary probes * whenever probe damage is suspected 10-10 Section 10-6 - Using a Phantom

[Page 287] 10-7-2 GEMS Leakage Current Limits The following limits are summarized for NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards. These limits are GEMS standards and in some cases are lower than the above standards listed. Table 10-12 Chassis Leakage Current Limits—Accessible Metal Surfaces Country Normal Condition Open Ground Reverse Polarity Open Neutral USA N/A 0.3 mA 0.3 mA N/A Other 0.1 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA Table 10-13 Type BF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Non-Conductive (Floating) Surface and Cavity Probes Normal Country Condition Open Ground Reverse Polarity Open Neutral *Mains Applied USA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA N/A Other 0.1 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA 5.0 mA Table 10-14 Type CF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Surgical Probes and ECG Connections Normal Country Condition Open Ground Reverse Polarity Open Neutral *Mains Applied USA 0.01 mA 0.05mA 0.05 mA N/A 0.025 mA Other 0.01 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA NOTE: *Mains Applied refers to the sink leakage test where mains (supply) voltage is applied to the part to determine the amount of current that will pass (or sink) to ground if a patient contacted mains voltage. The following tests are performed at the factory and should be performed at the site. These tests are: grounding continuity, chassis leakage current, probe leakage current, and ECG leakage current. All measurements are made with an electrical safety analyzer. Chapter 10 Periodic Maintenance 10-11

[Page 288] 10-7-3 Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada Test all outlets in the area for proper grounding and wiring arrangement by plugging in the neon outlet tester and noting the combination of lights that are illuminated. Any problems found should be reported to the hospital immediately and the receptacle should not be used. Figure 10-1 Typical Outlet Tester NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the Neutral (grounded supply) conductor and the Grounding (protective earth) conductor are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected. 10-12 Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests

[Page 289] 10-7-4 Grounding Continuity CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. The patient must not be contacted to the equipment during this test Measure the resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the exposed metal parts of the case. The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 ohms. Reference the procedure in the IEC 601-1.1. Figure 10-2 Ground Continuity Test 10-7-4-1 Meter Procedure Follow these steps to test the ground wire resistance. 1.) Turn the LOGIQ™ 9 unit OFF. 2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet. 3.) Plug the black chassis cable into the meter's “CHASSIS” connector and attach the black chassis cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the LOGIQ™ 9 unit. 4.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to the RESISTANCE position. 5.) Set the meter's “POLARITY” switch to the OFF (center) position. 6.) Measure and record the ground wire resistance. Chapter 10 Periodic Maintenance 10-13

[Page 290] 10-7-5 Chassis Leakage Current Test 10-7-5-1 Definition This test measures the current that would flow in a grounded person who touched accessible metal parts of the bedside station if the ground wire should break. The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made with the unit On and Off, with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed. Record the highest reading. CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, don't touch the unit! CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the unit is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching them using the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged. 10-7-5-2 Generic Procedure The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The testing meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made with the unit ON and OFF, with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed. Record the highest reading of current. Figure 10-3 Set Up for Chassis Source Leakage Current, IEC 601-1 Clause 19 - Continuos Leakage Currents and Patient, Auxiliary Currents 10-14 Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests

[Page 291] When using the Microguard or a similar test instrument, its power plug may be inserted into the wall outlet and the equipment under test is plugged into the receptacle on the panel of the meter. This places the meter in the grounding conductor and the current flowing from the case to ground will be indicated in any of the current ranges. The maximum allowable limit for chassis source leakage is shown in Table 10-12. 7.) Follow the test conditions described for respective test points shown in Table 10-15. Table 10-15 Chassis Leakage Current Test Condition TEST CONDITION 1 Mounting screw for probe receptacle 2 caster support 3 Mounting screw for CRT housing 4 Mounting screw for peripheral plugged into unit 5 Mounting screw for other peripheral powered by unit 8.) Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of PM data kept on site. Chapter 10 Periodic Maintenance 10-15

[Page 292] 10-7-5-3 Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in Table 10-12. Record all data on the PM Inspection Certificate. Table 10-16 Typical Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current Tester Neutral Test 1 Tester Polarity or Ground Probe Test 2 Test 3 Optional Optional Unit Power Switch Switch Connector caster CRT Test 4 Test 5 Enter Name of tested peripheral here: ON REV OPEN ON REV CLOSED OFF REV OPEN OFF REV CLOSED 10-7-6 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground 10-7-6-1 Definition This test measures the current which would flow to ground from any of the isolated ECG leads. The meter simulates a patient who is connected to the monitoring equipment and is grounded by touching some other grounded surface. Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the ultrasound console Off and On. For each combination the operating controls, such as the lead switch, should be operated to find the worst case condition. Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity when the unit is powered ON. Be sure CAUTION to turn the unit power OFF before switching the polarity using the POLARITY switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged. 10-16 Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests

[Page 293] 10-7-6-2 Generic Procedure Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the operating controls such as the lead switch should be operated to find the worst case condition. Appliance power switch Patient lead selector switch (if any) (use both "off" and "on" positions) The connection is at service entrance (activated as required) or on the supply side of a separately Polarity reversing switch derived system (use both positions) Patient connected leads Appliance H (Black) POWER OUTLET N (White) Internal circuitry Between each patient lead and ground G (Green) Building Insulating surface ground Current meter Grounding contact switch (use in both H = Hot "open" and "closed" positions) N = Neutral (grounded) G = Grounding conductor Figure 10-4 Test Circuit for Measuring Non-Isolated Patient Leads Table 10-17 Testing Power Conditions ECG Power Meter’s Polarity Switch Meter’s Neutral Switch ON REVERSE CLOSED ON REVERSE OPEN OFF REVERSE CLOSED OFF REVERSE OPEN Chapter 10 Periodic Maintenance 10-17

[Page 294] 10-7-7 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Lead Reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meter’s function selector to the LEAD-LEAD position. Select and test each of the five ECG lead positions (except ALL) on the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations found in the table. Record the highest leakage current measured. 10-7-8 Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test Reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meter’s function selector to the LEAD-ISO. Select the ALL position on the lead selector. Depress the rocker switch to ISO TEST to test lead isolation. CAUTION Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock hazard, the system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the ISO TEST switch is depressed. NOTE: It is not necessary to test each lead individually or power condition combinations as required in previous tests. 10-18 Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests

[Page 295] 10-7-8-1 Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in the table below. Record all data on the PM Inspection Certificate. Table 10-18 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current Maximum Allowance Limit AC Power GROUND Source GROUND OPEN CLOSED Patient Lead to Ground Leakage Current Test 115V 10uA 10uA and 220/240V 500uA 10uA Patient Lead to Lead Leakage Current Test Table 10-19 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current AC Power Maximum Source Allowance Limit 115V 20uA Patient Lead Isolation Current Test 220/240V 5mA Table 10-20 Typical Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current Tester Tester Tester Lead Selector ECG Polarity Ground Power Switch Switch RL RA LA LL C ON REVERSE CLOSED ON REVERSE OPEN OFF REVERSE CLOSED OFF REVERSE OPEN Chapter 10 Periodic Maintenance 10-19

[Page 296] 10-7-9 Probe Leakage Current Test 10-7-9-1 Definition This test measures the current that would flow to ground from any of the probes through a patient who is being scanned and becomes grounded by touching some other grounded surface. 10-7-9-2 Generic Procedure Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the probe must be active to find the worst case condition. POLARITY REVERSING SWITCH H (BLACK) PROBE CONSOLE N (WHITE) POWER OUTLET G (GREEN) MOMENTARY SWITCH LEAKAGE TEST METER Figure 10-5 Set Up for Probe Leakage Current NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage current, dependent on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement. 10-20 Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests

[Page 297] 10-7-9-3 No Meter Probe Adapter Procedure Figure 10-6 Check Without Probe Adapter Follow these steps to test each transducer for leakage current. 1.) Turn the LOGIQ™ 9 unit OFF. 2.) Plug the unit into the test meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet. 3.) Plug the external probe into the meter's “EXTERNAL” connector. 4.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to EXTERNAL position. 5.) Connect the probe for test with the connector of the console. 6.) Add the saline probe and the imaging area of the probe into the saline bath. 7.) Have unit power ON for the first part; turn it OFF for the second half. 8.) Depress the ISO TEST rocker switch and record the highest current reading. 9.) Follow the test conditions described in Table 10-21 for every transducer. 10.)Keep a record of the results with other hand copies of PM data. Chapter 10 Periodic Maintenance 10-21

[Page 298] 10-7-9-4 Data Sheet for Transducer Source Leakage Current The test passes when all readings measure less than the values shown in Table 10-13 and Table 10- 14. Record all data on the PM Inspection Certificate. Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the unit CAUTION is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching them using the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged Table 10-21 Typical Data Sheet For Transducer Source Leakage Current Transducer Tested: Tester Power Polarity Tester GROUND or Unit Power Switch NUETRAL Switch Measurement ON REV OPEN ON REV CLOSED OFF REV OPEN OFF REV CLOSED 10-22 Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests

[Page 299] Section 10-8 When There's Too Much Leakage Current... CHASSIS FAILS Check the ground on the power cord and plug for continuity. Ensure the ground is not broken, frayed, or intermittent. Replace any defective part. Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs. Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage. Test the wall outlet; verify it is grounded and is free of other wiring abnormalities. Notify the user or owner to correct any deviations. As a work around, check the other outlets to see if they could be used instead. NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the white neutral wire and the green grounding wire are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected. PROBE FAILS Test the probe in another connector to isolate if the fault lies with the probe or the scanner. NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage, dependent on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement. The maximum allowable leakage current for body surface contact probe differs from inter-cavity probe. Be sure to enter the correct probe type in the appropriate space on the check list. If excessive leakage current is slot dependent, inspect the system connector for bent pins, poor connections, and ground continuity. If the problem remains with the probe, replace the probe. PERIPHERAL FAILS Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs. Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage. STILL FAILS If all else fails, begin isolation by removing the probes, external peripherals, then the on board ones, one at a time while monitoring the leakage current measurement. NEW UNIT If the leakage current measurement tests fail on a new unit and if situation can not be corrected, submit a Safety Failure Report to document the system problem. Remove unit from operation. ECG FAILS Inspect cables for damage or poor connections. Chapter 10 Periodic Maintenance 10-23

[Page 300] PM INSPECTION CERTIFICATE Customer Name: System ID: Dispatch Number / Date Performed: Warranty/Contract/HBS System Type Model Number: Serial Number: Manufacture Date: Probe 1: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 2: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 3: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 4: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 5: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 6: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 7: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 8: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 9: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: * Scan Format: Phased Array, Linear Array, Curved Array, Mechanical Array or Other FUNCTIONAL CHECKS PHYSICAL INSPECTION AND CLEANING OK? or Physical Inspection and Cleaning Functional Check (if applicable) N/A (if applicable) Inspect Clean B-Mode Function Console Doppler Modes Function Monitor CF-Mode Function Touch Panel M-Mode Function Air Filter Applicable Software Options Probe Holders Applicable Hardware Options External I/O Control Panel Wheels, Brakes & Swivel Locks Monitor Cables and Connectors GE Approved Peripherals (VCR, CD-RW, MOD, Touch Panel Printers) Measurement Accuracy GE Approved Peripherals COMMENTS: ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ 10-24 Section 10-8 - When There's Too Much Leakage Current...

[Page 301] ELECTRICAL SAFETY Max Value Value Electrical Test Performed Allowed Measured OK? Comments Outlet (correct ground &wiring config.) System Ground Continuity Chassis Source Leakage Current - Probe Chassis Source Leakage Current - Caster Chassis Source Leakage Current - CRT Patient Lead Source Leakage (Lead to Ground) Patient Lead Source Leakage (Lead to Lead) Patient Lead Source Leakage (Isolation) Peripheral 1 Leakage Current Peripheral 1Ground Continuity Peripheral 2 Leakage Current Peripheral 2Ground Continuity Peripheral 3 Leakage Current Peripheral 3Ground Continuity PROBES Probe Number Max Value Max Value (from previous page) Allowed Measured OK? Comments Probe 1: Probe 2: Probe 3: Probe 4: Probe 5: Probe 6: Probe 7: Probe 8: Probe 9: Final Check. All system covers are in place. System scans with all probes as expected. Accepted by: ______________________________________________________________________ Chapter 10 Periodic Maintenance 10-25

[Page 302] This page was intentionally left blank. 10-26 Section 10-8 - When There's Too Much Leakage Current...

[Page 303] INDEX A,B Control Panel, 4-5 Acoustic Noise Output, 3-9 Customer Assistance, 1-11 Acquisition Diagnostics, 7-9 Archiving Images Move, 4-18 D Automatic Troubleshooting, 7-10 Dangerous Procedure Warnings, 1-9 B/M Mode Processor (BMP) Board, 5-16 Date/Time B/M-Mode Checks display location, 4-7 Functional Checks, 4-8 Depth scale Back End Processor, 5-20 display location, 4-7 Theory, 5-20 Diagnostics, 5-62, , 7-8 Backup Acquisition, 7-9 Patient Database, 4-15 Common, 7-16 Preset Configurations, 4-15 Direction Locks Basic Measurements Functional Checks, 4-23 Functional Checks, 4-10 BEP Power Off Path, 5-27 BEP Power On, 5-26 BEP Power On Path, 5-26 EBM Board, 5-16 Block Diagram ECG Simple System, 5-3 Functional Checks, 4-20 BMP Board Electrical General Description, 5-16 requirements, 2-2 Body pattern Electrical Safety, 1-8 Electrostatic Discharge Warning, 1-10 Boot Up, 3-6, , 4-2 EMC, 1-10 Brake EMI, 1-10 Adjustment, 6-13 EMI Protection, 3-5 Brake Arm EQ Board Adjustment, 6-11 Basic Functions, 5-15 Brakes General Description, 5-14 Functional Checks, 4-23 Equalization (EQ) Board, 5-14 ESD, 1-10 Ethernet Signal, 5-46 C Exam study Calibration Utilities, 7-13 display location, 4-7 Caps lock External I/O, 5-43 display location, 4-7 Bi-directional Signals, 5-44 CE Compliance, 1-10 Input Signals, 5-44 CFM and PWD Modes Location in the Unit, 5-43 Functional Checks, 4-9 Output Signals, 5-46 Cine Functional Checks, 4-12 Cine gauge Focal zone Common Diagnostics, 7-16 Configuration, 5-64 Front End Processor Connectivity Power Supply Board, 5-5 Worksheet, 3-16 Simple Theory, 5-5 Contact Information, 1-11 Front End Subsystem, 5-6 Index I

[Page 304] Front Panel L Front Panel Light, 7-15 Label Locations, 1-8 Testing the Front Panel Keys, 7-14 LEDs SCB, 5-12 Functional Checks, 4-1 Logs, 5-59 B/M-Mode Checks, 4-8 Basic Measurements, 4-10 Brakes, 4-22, , 4-23 CFM and PWD Modes, 4-9 Measurement summary window Control Panel, 4-5 ECG Checkout, 4-20 Mechanical Checks Image Management, 4-13 Operator I/O, 4-22 Locks, 4-23 Mechanical Safety, 1-7 Mechanical, 4-22 Media Monitor Display, 4-7 Formatting, 4-15 Peripherals, 4-21 MOD Probes/Connector Usage, 4-11 Functonal Checks, 4-14 Required Equipment, 4-1 Models Covered, 1-2, , 9-2 Touch Panel, 4-6 Modem, 5-47 Using Cine, 4-12 Inputs/Outputs, 5-47 Using the MOD, 4-14 LEDs, 5-47 Location in the Unit, 5-47 Monitor, 5-43 G Adjustment, 6-2 Gas Spring Counter-balance Adjustment, 6-4 Adjustment, 6-6 Tilt, 6-4 Gathering Trouble Data, 7-2 Tilt Adjustment, 6-4 General Cleaning, 10-7 Monitor Display Gray/color bar Functioanl Checks, 4-7 display location, 4-7 Monitor display location, 4-7 Move H Archiving Images, 4-18 Hazard Icons, 1-4 Hospital name display location, 4-7 O Human Safety, 1-7 Operator I/O Emergency Release Procedure, 6-10 Operator identification I display location, 4-7 Image Management Functional Checks, 4-13 Image management menu P display location, 4-7 P4 Key Function, 7-4 Image preview Patient I/O, 5-33 display location, 4-7 Patient identification Imaging parameters display location, 4-7 display location, 4-7 Patient name Inrush Current, 2-2 display location, 4-7 Institution name PC Diagnostics, 7-17 display location, 4-7 Audio Test, 7-18 Internal I/O CD/DVD Drive Test, 7-17 connections, 5-36 CPU Tests, 7-17 Outputs, 5-40 Hard Drive Tests, 7-17 Keyboard Test, 7-18 Memory Tests, 7-17 II -

[Page 305] Monitor Test, 7-18 Screen Captures, 7-4 PCI Board Configuration Test, 7-17 Service Adjustments, 6-1 USB Test, 7-17 Service Manual Video Test, 7-17 Purpose of, 1-1 PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests), 7-18 Shut Down PCVIC Card, 5-21 Procedure, 4-3 Peripherals, 5-46 Shutdown, 3-7 Functional Checks, 4-21 System Maintenance, 10-5 Physical Dimensions, 3-9 System Manufacturer, 1-12 Power Distribution, 5-49 System messages Basic Overall AC, 5-49 display location, 4-7 Power Off, 3-7 System status (real-time or frozen) Procedure, 4-3 display location, 4-7 Power On, 3-6, , 4-2 Power output readout display location, 4-7 T Power Requirements, 2-2 TGC electrical, 2-2 stability, 2-3 Theory Power Stability Requirements, 2-3 Front End SubSystem, 5-6 Power-up Procedures General, 5-2 Voltage Settings, 3-5 RF Amplifier Board, 5-8 Prepearing the Unit for Installation, 3-5 XDIF Board, 5-7 Probe Connector Cleaning, 10-9 Time Delay (TD) Boards, 5-10 Probe identifier Top Console, 5-42 See Operator I/O, 5-42 Probe orientation marker Top Plane Board, 5-7 Touch Panel Probes, 3-15 Functional Checks, 4-5, , 4-6 Disconnecting, 4-20 Trackball functionality status Probes/Connector Usage Functional Checks, 4-11 Trouble Image with Logs, 7-3 Product Icons, 1-5 Troubleshooting Gathering Trouble Data, 7-2 Screen Captures, 7-4 R Trouble Image with Logs, 7-3 Rear Wheel Brakes Vital System Information, 7-2 Adjustment, 6-14 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment, 3-4 Regulatory, 6-1 U Release Lock Assembly Unpacking the Equipment, 3-4 Replacement Procedure, 8-28, , 8-29 Utilities, 5-64 Restore Patient Database, 4-17 Preset Configurations, 4-17 RF Amplifier Board Video Theory, 5-8 Specifications, 3-14 Voltage Settings, 3-5 Safety Considerations, 1-7 Scan Control Board Warnings and Cautions, 1-7 High Level Features, 5-12 Weight without Monitor and Peripherals, 3-9 Scan Control Board (SCB), 5-11 SCB LED, 5-12 III

[Page 306] XDIF Board Theory, 5-7 Z-Release Cable Adjustment, 6-6 IV -

[Page 307]

[Page 308] GE Medical Systems GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371 P.O. Box 414; Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201, U.S.A. (Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America) GE Ultraschall:Tel: +49 (0) 212 28 02 208 Deutschland GmbH & Co KG Beethovenstrabe 239, Postfach 11 05 60 D-42655 Solingen, German